TWI238011B - Methods and systems for sub-pixel rendering with gamma adjustment - Google Patents

Methods and systems for sub-pixel rendering with gamma adjustment Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI238011B
TWI238011B TW91117885A TW91117885A TWI238011B TW I238011 B TWI238011 B TW I238011B TW 91117885 A TW91117885 A TW 91117885A TW 91117885 A TW91117885 A TW 91117885A TW I238011 B TWI238011 B TW I238011B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
data
pixel
sub
gamma
vin
Prior art date
Application number
TW91117885A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Candice Hellen Brown Elliott
Seok-Jin Han
Moon-Hwan Im
In-Chul Baek
Michael Francis Higgins
Original Assignee
Clairvoyante Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Clairvoyante Inc filed Critical Clairvoyante Inc
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI238011B publication Critical patent/TWI238011B/en

Links

Abstract

The present invention discloses methods and system for sub-pixel rendering with gamma adjustment. The gamma adjustment allows the luminance for the sub-pixel arrangement to match the non-linear gamma response of luminance channels of the human eyes. The chrominance can match the linear response of the chrominance channels of the human eyes. The gamma correction allows the algorithms to operate independently of the actual gamma value of a display device. The sub-pixel rendering with gamma adjustment disclosed can be optimized for the gamma value of a display device to improve the response time, dot inversion balance, and contrast because the gamma correction and compensation of the sub-pixel rendering algorithm provide the required gamma value through sub-pixel rendering. These techniques can be attached to any specified gamma transfer curve.

Description

psrnmpsrnm

玖、發明說明 (發明說明應敘明·發明所屬之技術領域、先前技術、內容、實施方式及圖式簡單說明) 發明領域 本發明一般而言關於顯示器的領域,更特定言之,係關 於用於顯示器的具有伽瑪調整之次像素呈現之方法及系 統。 發明背景 目前最新的用於平板顯示器之彩色單平面成像矩陣係 使用RGB彩色三合一,或垂直長條的單一色彩,如圖1之 先前技藝所示。該系統採用了 Von Bezold彩色混合效應(以 下會進一步解釋),其分離三個彩色,並在每個彩色上放 置相等的空間頻率加權。但是,這些面板與人類視覺的匹 配不良。 目前已經開發了圖形呈現技術來改善先前技藝之面板 的影像品質。Benzschawel等人所提出的美國專利編號 5,341,153揭示如何降低一較大尺寸的影像到一較小的面 板。為此目的,Benzschawel等人揭不如何使用現在於本技 藝中為人所熟知的”次像素呈現”技術來改進影像品質。更 近年來,Hill等人所提的美國專利編號6,188,385,其揭示如 何使用非常相似的次像素呈線技術來一次一個字地降低 文字的實際影像。 上述的先前技藝對於人類視覺的運作有不適當的認 識。先前技藝中由該顯示裝置所重新建構的影像與人類視 覺的匹配性不佳。说明 Description of Invention Method and system for displaying sub-pixels with gamma adjustment on a display. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION The latest color single-plane imaging matrices for flat panel displays use RGB color triples, or a single color with vertical bars, as shown in the prior art of FIG. This system uses the Von Bezold color mixing effect (explained further below), which separates three colors and places equal spatial frequency weights on each color. However, these panels do not match well with human vision. Graphics rendering technology has been developed to improve the image quality of previous technology panels. U.S. Patent No. 5,341,153 by Benzschawel et al. Discloses how to reduce a larger image size to a smaller panel. To this end, Benzschawel et al. Have disclosed how to use the "sub-pixel rendering" technology now known in the art to improve image quality. More recently, U.S. Patent No. 6,188,385 to Hill et al. Discloses how to use very similar sub-pixel rendering techniques to lower the actual image of the text one character at a time. The previous techniques described above have inappropriate knowledge of the functioning of human vision. The image reconstructed by the display device in the prior art does not match well with human vision.

用於取樣或產生,及之後儲存這些顯示器的影像之主要 模型為RGB像素(或三色像素元件),其中紅、綠及藍色值 係在一正交性同等空間解析度格柵上,並重合。使用此影 像格式的結果之一為其與該實際影像重構面板及其相隔 開的非重合彩色放射器,以及人類視覺皆不甚匹配。此會 實質上造成冗餘或浪費該影像中的資訊。The main model used to sample or generate, and then store the images of these displays is RGB pixels (or tri-color pixel elements), where the red, green and blue values are on an orthogonal spatial resolution grid, and coincide. One of the results of using this image format is that it does not match the actual image reconstruction panel, its non-coincided color emitters, and human vision. This would essentially cause redundancy or wasted information in the image.

Martinez-Uriegas等人的美國專利編號5,398,066及Peters等人 的美國專利編號5,541,653揭示一種技術來由RGB像素格式 轉換及儲存影像到一非常類似於Bayer在美國專利編號 3,971,065所提出的攝影機之成像裝置的一彩色濾波器陣 列。Martinez-Uriegas等人之格式的好處在於其同時以類似的 空間取樣頻率來補捉及儲存分離的彩色成分資料,如同人 類的視覺。但是,其第一個缺點是Martinez-Uriegas等人的格 式無法良好地匹配於賁際的彩色顯示面板。為此原因, Martinez-Uriegas等人亦揭不如何來將該影像轉換回到RGB 像素格式。Martinez-Uriegas等人之格式的另一個缺點是該彩 色成分中的一個並未定期地取樣,在此例中為紅色。在該 陣列中會有遺失的樣本,造成在顯示時降低了該影像的建 構準確性。 在眼睛中由稱之為錐體之三種彩色受體神經細胞形式 中來產生完整的彩色感知。該三種形式係敏感於不同光線 的波長:長、中及短(分別為紅、綠及藍該三種波長的 相對密度彼此有明顯的不同。紅色的受體要比綠色的稍 多。相較於紅色或綠色受體,藍色受體非常少。除了該彩 終 I23S011 更.骀 色受體,有相對波長不敏感的受體,稱之為桿,其會有助 於單色的夜間視覺。 人類視覺系統係在數個感知通道中處理眼睛所偵測的 資訊:照度、色差及運動。運動對於成像系統設計者而言 僅對於閃爍臨界值較為重要。該照度通道僅採用來自紅色 及綠色受體的輸入。其為,,色盲」。其以類似的方式處理資 訊,而增進了邊緣的對比。該色差通道並不具有邊緣對比 增進。因為該照度通道使用及增進每一個紅色及綠色受 體,該照度通道的解析度係高於該色差通道的數倍。該藍 色受髖對於照度感知的貢獻可以忽略。因此,由降低一個 八度的藍色解析度所造成的誤差,對於大多數的感知觀視 者而言幾乎無法注意到,如同完全沒有,其可見於Xerox 及 NASA,Ames Research Center的實驗(見於 R. Martin,J· Gille,J·Martinez-Uriegas et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,398,066 and Peters et al. U.S. Patent No. 5,541,653 disclose a technique for converting and storing images from the RGB pixel format to a camera very similar to that proposed by Bayer in U.S. Patent No. 3,971,065 A color filter array of the imaging device. The advantage of the format of Martinez-Uriegas et al. Is that it simultaneously captures and stores the separated color component data at a similar spatial sampling frequency, just like human vision. However, its first disadvantage is that the format of Martinez-Uriegas et al. Does not match well with the color display panel of the world. For this reason, Martinez-Uriegas et al. Also revealed how to convert the image back to the RGB pixel format. Another disadvantage of the format of Martinez-Uriegas et al. Is that one of the color components is not sampled regularly, in this case red. There will be missing samples in the array, which reduces the structural accuracy of the image during display. Complete color perception is produced in the eye by three forms of color receptor nerve cells called pyramids. The three forms are sensitive to different wavelengths of light: long, medium, and short (red, green, and blue, respectively. The relative densities of the three wavelengths are significantly different from each other. The acceptors for red are slightly more than those for green. Compared to Red or green receptors, blue receptors are very few. In addition to the color terminal I23S011, ochre receptors, there are relatively wavelength-insensitive receptors, called rods, which will help monochrome night vision. The human vision system processes the information detected by the eyes in several perceptual channels: illumination, chromatic aberration, and motion. Motion is more important for imaging system designers only for the threshold of flicker. This illumination channel uses only red and green sensors. The input of the body is: color blindness. It processes information in a similar way and enhances the edge contrast. The color difference channel does not have edge contrast enhancement. Because the illuminance channel uses and enhances each red and green receptor The resolution of the illuminance channel is several times higher than the color difference channel. The contribution of the blue receiver hip to the illuminance perception is negligible. Therefore, by decreasing one octave The error caused by the blue resolution is almost unnoticeable to most perceptual viewers, as it is completely absent. It can be seen in experiments by Xerox and NASA, Ames Research Center (see R. Martin, J. Gille, J ·

Marimer,Detectability of Reduced Blue Pixel Count in Projection Displays,SID Digest 1993)。 彩色感知受到稱之為,,同化」處理或Von Bezold彩色混合 效應的影響。此可允許一顯示器的分離彩色像素(或次像 素或放射器)來感知成為混合的色彩。此混合效應係發生 在觀視範圍中一給定的角度距離內。由於該相對稀少的藍 色受體,此混合之發生對於藍色會比紅色或綠色會具有一 更大的角度。此距離對於藍色大約為0.25。,而對於紅色或 錄色大約為0.12。。在12英吋的觀視距離下,0.25。相對在一 顯示器上的50密爾(1,270 μ)。因此,如果該藍色次像素間 距小於此混合間距的一半(625 μ),該彩色將可混合,而不 會損失圖像品質。 次像素呈現在其最簡化的實施中,係將該次像素做為由 該照度通道所感知的大略相等的亮度像素來運作。此允許 該次像素做為取樣的影像重構點,其相反於使用該結合的 次像素成為一,,真實”像素的一部份。藉由使用次像素呈 現,該空間取樣可以增加,並降低該相位誤差。 如果該影像的彩色要被忽略,則每個次像素可視為每個 皆相等,如同其為一單色像素。但是,因為彩色幾乎是永 遠重要(此即為何人們要使用一彩色顯示器),則一給定影 像的彩色平衡在每個位置皆重要。因此,該次像素呈現演 算法必須藉由保證在要呈現的影像之照度成分中該空間 頻率資訊不會化名為該彩色次像素而造成彩色誤差,來維 持彩色平衡。由Benzchawel等人的美國專利_號5,341,153及 Hill等人的美國專利編號6,188,385係類似於一常用的反別 名技術,其應用取代的消滅濾波器到一較高解析度之虛擬 影像的每個分離的彩色成分。此可保證該照度資訊並未在 每個彩色通道內化名。 如果該次像素的配置對於次像素呈現為最佳化,次像素 呈現將提供同時增加較低相位誤差的空間可定址性,及增 加在兩軸上調變轉移函數(MTF)之高空間頻率解析度。 檢視圖1中習用的RGB長條顯示器,次像素呈現僅可應用 在水平軸。該藍色次像素並未由該人類照度通道所感知, 因此在該次像素呈現中沒有影響。因為僅有紅色及綠色像 素可用於次像素呈現,在可定址性中的有效增加在水平軸 -10- 上為兩個交叉。垂直黑線及白線必須在每一列中具有兩主 要的次像素(即每條黑線或白線為紅色及綠色)。此與用於 非次像素呈現的影像具有相同的數目。該MTF,其具有同 時顯示一給定數目之線及間隔之能力,其並未由次像素呈 現所增進。因此,如圖1所示之習用的RGB長條次像素配 置對於次像素呈現並未最佳化。 先前技藝的三色像素元件之配置係顯示成同時對於人 類視覺及該次像素呈現之一般化技術之匹配性皆很差。類 似地,先前的影像格式及習用方法對於人類視覺及實際的 彩色放射器配置皆匹配不良。 次像素呈現之另一種複雜性為處理對於人眼及顯示裝 置之売度或照度的非線性反應(例如一伽瑪曲線),例如一 陰極射線管(CRT)裝置或一液晶顯示器(LCD)。但是,補償 次像素呈現之伽瑪值並非一煩瑣的處理。也就是說,其很 難來提供次像素呈現的影像之高對比及正確的彩色平 衡。再者:先前技藝的次像素呈現系統並未適當地提供精 確的伽瑪控制來提供高品質影像。 發明概要 本發明中揭示一種用以處理資料給一顯示器之方法。該 顯示器包含具有彩色次像素之像素。其接收的像素資料, 並施加一伽瑪調整到由該像素資料轉換到一次像素呈現 的資料。該轉換可產生一次像素配置的該次像素呈現的資 料。該次像素配置包含在至少一水平軸及一垂直軸之一之 上交替紅色及綠色次像素。該次像素呈現的資料係输出到Marimer, Detectability of Reduced Blue Pixel Count in Projection Displays, SID Digest 1993). Color perception is affected by what is called, assimilation, or the Von Bezold color mixing effect. This allows a display's separated color pixels (or sub-pixels or emitters) to be perceived as mixed colors. This mixed effect occurs within a given angular distance in the viewing range. Due to the relatively scarce blue receptor, this mixing will occur at a greater angle to blue than red or green. This distance is approximately 0.25 for blue. , And for red or color recording is about 0.12. . At a viewing distance of 12 inches, 0.25. Opposite 50 mils (1,270 μ) on a display. Therefore, if the blue sub-pixel pitch is less than half (625 μ) of this blending pitch, the colors will be blended without loss of image quality. In its most simplified implementation, the sub-pixel rendering operates as a sub-pixel with approximately equal brightness pixels as perceived by the illuminance channel. This allows the sub-pixel to be used as a sampled image reconstruction point, as opposed to using the combined sub-pixel as part of a "real" pixel. By using sub-pixel rendering, the spatial sampling can be increased and decreased This phase error. If the color of the image is to be ignored, each sub-pixel can be considered equal to each other, as if it were a monochrome pixel. However, because color is almost always important (this is why people use a color Monitor), the color balance of a given image is important at every position. Therefore, the sub-pixel rendering algorithm must ensure that the spatial frequency information in the illuminance component of the image to be rendered will not be renamed the color Subpixels cause color errors to maintain color balance. US Patent No. 5,341,153 by Benzchawel et al. And US Patent No. 6,188,385 by Hill et al. Are similar to a commonly used anti-aliasing technique, and their application replaces the elimination Filter to each separate color component of a higher resolution virtual image. This ensures that the illuminance information is not in each color channel If the sub-pixel configuration is optimized for sub-pixel rendering, the sub-pixel rendering will provide spatial addressability that simultaneously increases lower phase errors, and increases the high spatial frequency of the modulation transfer function (MTF) on both axes Resolution. The conventional RGB bar display in inspection view 1. The sub-pixel rendering can only be applied on the horizontal axis. The blue sub-pixel is not perceived by the human illumination channel, so it has no effect on the sub-pixel rendering. Because Only red and green pixels can be used for sub-pixel rendering, and the effective increase in addressability is two crossings on the horizontal axis-10-. The vertical black and white lines must have two main sub-pixels in each column (ie Each black or white line is red and green). This is the same number as the image used for non-subpixel rendering. The MTF, which has the ability to display a given number of lines and spaces at the same time, is Pixel rendering has been improved. Therefore, the conventional RGB stripe sub-pixel configuration shown in Figure 1 is not optimized for sub-pixel rendering. The prior art three-color pixel device configuration is At the same time, the matching of human vision and the general technology of the sub-pixel rendering is very poor. Similarly, the previous image formats and conventional methods are poorly matched for human vision and the actual color emitter configuration. Sub-pixel rendering is another One complexity is dealing with non-linear responses (such as a gamma curve) to the human eye and display device ’s brightness or illuminance, such as a cathode ray tube (CRT) device or a liquid crystal display (LCD). However, sub-pixel compensation The rendered gamma value is not a cumbersome process. That is, it is difficult to provide a high contrast and correct color balance of the sub-pixel rendered image. Furthermore: the prior art sub-pixel rendering systems did not properly provide accurate Gamma control to provide high-quality images. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION A method for processing data to a display is disclosed. The display includes pixels with color sub-pixels. It receives the pixel data and applies a gamma adjustment to the pixel data converted to the data presented by a pixel. This conversion can produce data for that sub-pixel representation of a single-pixel configuration. The sub-pixel arrangement includes alternating red and green sub-pixels on at least one of a horizontal axis and a vertical axis. The data presented by this sub-pixel is output to

該顯示器。 本發明係揭示一種具有複數個像素之顯示器的系統。該 像素可具有一次像素配置,其包含在至少一水平軸及一垂 直軸之一之上交替紅色及綠色次像素。該系統亦包含耦合 於該顯示器之控制器,並處理像素資料。該控制器亦施加 一伽瑪調整到由該像素資料到次像素呈現的資料之轉 換。該轉換可產生該次像素配置之次像素呈現的資料。該 控制器在該顯示器上输出該次像素呈現的資料。 本發明的其它特徵及好處將可由以下的詳細說明來瞭 解。 圖式簡單說明 所附之圖式係引用來構成此申請書的一部份來說明本 發明,並具有說明來解釋本發明的原理。在圖式中, 圖1所示為先前技藝中,對於一顯示裝置在一單一平 面,一陣列中的三色像素元件的RGB長條配置; 圖2所示為圖1之先前技藝RGB長條配置之有效的次像素 呈現取樣點; 圖3、4及5所不為對於圖1之先前技藝之RGB長條配置之 取樣點的每個彩色平面之有效的次像素呈現取樣區域; 圖6所示為對於一顯示裝置在一單一平面,一陣列中的 三色像素元件的配置; 圖7所示為圖6及27之配置之有效的次像素呈現取樣點; 圖8及9所示為圖6及27之配置的藍色平面取樣點之另一 個有效次像素呈現取樣區域; -12- 修 1238011, · :々 •卜…、 圖10所示為對於一顯示裝置在一單一平面,一陣列中的 三色像素元件的另一個配置; 圖1 1所示為圖1 〇之配置之有效的次像素呈現取樣點; 圖12所示為圖10之配置之藍色平面取樣點之有效的次 像素呈現取樣區域; 圖13及14所示為圖6及10之配置中該紅色及綠色平面的 有效次像素呈現取樣區域; 圖15所示為一樣本點的陣列,及其為先前技藝之像素資 料格式的有效樣本區域,其中該紅、綠及藍色值係在一相 等空間解析度格柵,並重合; 圖16所示為先前技藝之圖15的樣本點之陣列覆蓋在圖 11之次像素呈現的樣本點上,其中圖15之樣本點係與圖11 之紅色及綠色”檢查板”陣列具有相同的空間解析度格柵 並重合; 圖17所示為樣本點之陣列,及其先前技藝圖15之有效樣 本區域覆蓋在圖12之藍色平面取樣區域上,其中先前技藝 圖15之樣本點係與圖11之紅色及綠色”檢查板”陣列具有 相同的空間解析度格柵並重合; 圖18所示為樣本點之陣列,及其先前技藝圖15之有效樣 本區域覆蓋在圖13之紅色平面取樣區域上,其中先前技藝 圖15之樣本點係與圖11之紅色及綠色”檢查板”陣列具有 相同的空間解析度格柵並重合; 圖19及20所示為樣本點之陣列,及其先前技藝圖15之有 效樣本區域覆蓋在圖8及9之藍色平面取樣區域上,其中先 -13 - fMWF - 前技藝圖1 5之樣本點係與圖7之紅色及綠色”檢查板”陣列 具有相同的空間解析度格柵並重合; 圖21所示為一樣本點的陣列,及其為先前技藝之像素資 料格式的有效樣本區域,其中該紅、綠及藍色值係在一相 等空間解析度格柵,並重合; 圖22所示為樣本點之陣列,及其先前技藝圖21之有效樣 本區域覆蓋在圖13之紅色平面取樣區域上,其中圖21之樣 本點並未與圖1 1之紅色及綠色”檢查板”陣列具有相同的 空間解析度格柵也不重合; 圖23所示為樣本點之陣列,及其先前技藝圖2 1之有效樣 本區域覆蓋在圖12之藍色平面取樣區域上,其中先前技藝 之圖2 1之樣本點並未與圖1 1之紅色及綠色”檢查板”陣列 具有相同的空間解析度格柵也不重合; 圖24所示為樣本點之陣列,及其先前技藝圖21之有效樣 本區域覆蓋在圖8之藍色平面取樣區域上,其中先前技藝 之圖2 1之樣本點並未與圖7之紅色及綠色,,檢查板”陣列具 有相同的空間解析度格柵也不重合; 圖25所示為圖3之紅色平面的有效樣本區域覆蓋在圖13 之紅色平面取樣區域上; 圖26所示為圖5之藍色平面的有效樣本區域覆蓋在圖8 之藍色平面取樣區域上; 圖27所示為對於一顯示裝置在三個面板的一陣列中的 三色像素元件的另一個配置; 圖2 8、29及3 0所示為在圖27之裝置的每個分離面板上藍 5?2评働 色、綠色及紅色放射器之配置; 圖31所示為圖11之输出樣本配置200在一特例中覆蓋在 圖15之输入樣本配置70之上方,當該調整比例對於每兩個 (一紅一綠)输出次像素交叉為一输入像素; 圖32所示為一單一重覆單元202來轉換一 650x480 VGA格 式影像到一 PenTile矩陣,其具有800x600之總紅及綠次像素; 圖33所示為在該重覆單元尺寸為奇數之下一三色像素 元件的係數中的對稱性; 圖3 4所示為當該重覆單元尺寸為偶數時的一範例; 圖35所示為由一呈現區域246所限定的來自圖33之次像 素218,其覆蓋了周圍的6個輸入像素樣本區域248; 圖36所示為來自圖33之次像素232與其呈現區域250覆蓋 了 5個樣本區域252 ; 圖37所示為來自圖33之次像素234與其呈現區域254覆蓋 了樣本區域256 ; 圖38所示為來自圖33之次像素228與其呈現區域258覆蓋 了樣本區域260 ; 圖39所示為來自圖33之次像素236與其呈現區域264覆蓋 了樣本區域262 ; 圖40所示為用於產生藍色濾波器核心之正方形取樣區 域; 圖41所示為關於該正方形取樣區域276之圖8的六角形 取樣區域123 ; 圖42A所示為具有圖18之紅色或綠色次像素的一重新 -15-The display. The invention discloses a display system with a plurality of pixels. The pixel may have a primary pixel configuration including alternating red and green sub-pixels on at least one of a horizontal axis and a vertical axis. The system also includes a controller coupled to the display and processes pixel data. The controller also applies a gamma adjustment to convert from the pixel data to the data presented by the sub-pixels. The conversion can generate data presented by the sub-pixels of the sub-pixel configuration. The controller outputs the data presented by the sub-pixel on the display. Other features and benefits of the present invention will be understood from the following detailed description. Brief Description of the Drawings The accompanying drawings are incorporated by reference to form a part of this application to illustrate the invention, and are provided with explanations to explain the principles of the invention. In the drawings, FIG. 1 shows the prior art RGB stripe arrangement of three color pixel elements in an array for a display device on a single plane; FIG. 2 shows the prior art RGB stripe of FIG. 1 The effective sub-pixel configuration presents sampling points; Figs. 3, 4 and 5 do not represent the effective sub-pixel for each color plane of the sampling points of the RGB stripe configuration of the prior art of Fig. 1; Shown is the arrangement of three-color pixel elements in a single plane and an array for a display device; Figure 7 shows the effective sub-pixel rendering sampling points of the configurations of Figures 6 and 27; Figures 8 and 9 are diagrams Another effective sub-pixel of the blue plane sampling points arranged at 6 and 27 presents the sampling area; -12- 修 1238011, ·: 々 · 卜 ... Figure 10 shows a display device on a single plane, an array Another configuration of the three-color pixel element in Figure; Figure 11 shows the effective sub-pixel rendering sampling points of the configuration of Figure 10; Figure 12 shows the effective sub-pixel sampling points of the blue plane configuration of Figure 10 Pixels present sampling areas; Figures 13 and 14 show Figure 6 In the configuration of 10, the effective sub-pixels of the red and green planes present sampling areas. Figure 15 shows an array of identical points and the effective sample areas of the pixel data format of the prior art, where the red, green, and blue The values are in an equal spatial resolution grid and coincide; FIG. 16 shows the array of the sample points of FIG. 15 of the prior art overlaid on the sample points of the sub-pixel presentation of FIG. 11, where the sample points of FIG. 15 are related to The red and green “inspection board” arrays in FIG. 11 have the same spatial resolution grid and overlap; FIG. 17 shows an array of sample points, and its prior art. The effective sample area of FIG. 15 covers the blue plane of FIG. 12 In the sampling area, the sample point of the previous technique in FIG. 15 has the same spatial resolution grid as the red and green “check board” array of FIG. 11 and coincides; FIG. 18 shows the array of sample points and its previous technique. The valid sample area of FIG. 15 is overlaid on the red plane sampling area of FIG. 13. The sample points of the prior art in FIG. 15 have the same spatial solution as the red and green “check board” array of FIG. 11. Degree grids are coincident; Figures 19 and 20 show the array of sample points and their previous techniques. The valid sample area of Figure 15 covers the blue plane sampling area of Figures 8 and 9, where -13-fMWF-front The sample points of Figure 15 are the same spatial resolution grids as the red and green "check board" arrays of Figure 7; they are coincident; Figure 21 shows an array of the same points and the pixel data of the previous technology. The valid sample area of the format, where the red, green and blue values are in an equal spatial resolution grid, and coincide; Figure 22 shows the array of sample points, and its prior art. The valid sample area of Figure 21 covers In the sampling area of the red plane in FIG. 13, the sample points in FIG. 21 do not overlap with the red and green “check board” arrays in FIG. 11 and have the same spatial resolution grid; FIG. 23 shows the sample points. The array and its previous technique The effective sample area of FIG. 21 covers the blue plane sampling area of FIG. 12, where the sample points of FIG. 21 of the prior art are not the same as the red and green “check board” array of FIG. Have the same space The resolution grids also do not overlap; Figure 24 shows the array of sample points and their prior art. The effective sample area of Figure 21 covers the blue flat sampling area of Figure 8. Among them, the sample points of Figure 21 of the previous technology. It does not overlap with the red and green colors in FIG. 7, and the checkerboard array has the same spatial resolution grid; FIG. 25 shows that the valid sample area on the red plane of FIG. 3 covers the sampling area on the red plane of FIG. 13. Fig. 26 shows that the effective sample area of the blue plane of Fig. 5 is overlaid on the sample area of the blue plane of Fig. 8; Fig. 27 shows the three-color pixels in an array of three panels for a display device Another configuration of the components; Figures 28, 29 and 30 show the configuration of the blue 5? 2 color, green and red emitters on each separate panel of the device of Figure 27; Figure 31 shows the diagram The output sample configuration 200 of 11 is overlaid on top of the input sample configuration 70 of FIG. 15 in a special case. When the adjustment ratio is crossed for each two (one red and one green) output sub-pixel as one input pixel; FIG. 32 shows A single repeating unit 202 to convert a 650x480 VGA format image to a PenTile matrix, which has 800x600 total red and green sub-pixels; Figure 33 shows the symmetry in the coefficients of a three-color pixel element below the size of the repeating unit is odd; FIG. 35 shows an example when the size of the repeating unit is even; FIG. 35 shows the sub-pixel 218 from FIG. 33 defined by a presentation area 246, which covers the surrounding 6 input pixel sample areas 248; 36 shows that the sub-pixel 232 and its rendering area 250 from FIG. 33 cover 5 sample areas 252; FIG. 37 shows that the sub-pixel 234 and its rendering area 254 from FIG. 33 cover the sample area 256; FIG. 38 shows The sub-pixel 228 and its presentation area 258 from FIG. 33 cover the sample area 260; FIG. 39 shows that the sub-pixel 236 and its presentation area 264 from FIG. 33 cover the sample area 262; and FIG. 40 shows that it is used to generate blue filtering. The square sampling area of the processor core; FIG. 41 shows the hexagonal sampling area 123 of FIG. 8 with respect to the square sampling area 276; FIG. 42A shows a re--15-

取樣區域之範例性指示樣本區域,而圖42B所示為在一顯 示裝置上三色次像素之範例性配置; 圖43所示為一範例性輸入正弦波; 圖44所示為當圖43之输入影像受到無伽瑪調整的次像 素呈現時,該輸出的範例性圖形; 圖45所示為描述彩色誤差的範例性顯示功能圖,其可使 用無伽瑪調整之次像素呈現所發生; 圖46所示為在次像素呈現之前應用一預調整伽瑪值的 方法之流程圖; 圖47所示為當圖43之輸入影像受到伽瑪調整過的次像 素呈現時,該输出的範例性圖形; 圖48所示為計算圖42A之指示的樣本區域之局部覆蓋 率; 圖49所示為一種用於伽瑪調整的次像素呈現之方法的 流程圖; 圖50所不為當圖43之輸入影像受到具有一歐米函數 之伽瑪調整過的次像素呈現時,該輸出的範例性圖形; 圖51所示為一種具有該歐米茄調整的伽碼調整過的次 像素呈現之方法的流程圖; 圖52A及52B所示為一種範例性系統來賁施在次像素呈 現之前施加一預調整伽瑪值之圖46的方法; 圖53A及53B所示為實施圖49之方法來進行伽瑪調整呈 現之範例性系統; 圖54A及54B所示為實施圖51之方法來進行具有一歐米茄 -16 -An example of the sampling area indicates the sample area, and FIG. 42B shows an exemplary configuration of three-color sub-pixels on a display device; FIG. 43 shows an exemplary input sine wave; An exemplary image of the output when the input image is subjected to sub-pixel rendering without gamma adjustment; FIG. 45 shows an exemplary display function diagram describing the color error, which can occur using sub-pixel rendering without gamma adjustment; FIG. 46 shows a flowchart of a method for applying a pre-adjusted gamma value before sub-pixel rendering; FIG. 47 shows an exemplary graphic of the output when the input image of FIG. 43 is subjected to gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering Figure 48 shows the calculation of the partial coverage of the sample area indicated in Figure 42A; Figure 49 shows a flowchart of a method for sub-pixel rendering for gamma adjustment; Figure 50 is not the input of Figure 43 An exemplary graphic of the output when the image is presented with a gamma-adjusted sub-pixel with an omega function; FIG. 51 shows the flow of a method with the omega-adjusted gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering 52A and 52B show an exemplary system to apply the method of FIG. 46 to apply a pre-adjusted gamma value before sub-pixel rendering; FIGS. 53A and 53B show the method of FIG. 49 to perform gamma adjustment Exemplary system presented; Figures 54A and 54B show the implementation of the method of Figure 51 to have an omega-16-

mmM uu.mmM uu.

I 函數的伽瑪調整之次像素呈現之範例性系統; 圖55到60所示為可用於圖52A、53A及54A的處理方塊的範 例性電路; 圖6 1所示為在次像素呈現期間計時邊緣的黑色像素之 方法的流程圖; 圖62到66所示為改進一顯示器上影像的彩色解析度之 系統的範例性方塊圖; 圖67到70所示為執行高速數學計算之函數評估器之範 例性具體實施例; 圖7 1所示為以軟體實施具有伽瑪調整方法之次呈現的 處理之流程圖;及 圖72所示為實施圖46、49及51及/或圖71之軟體處理的 方法之範例性電腦系統之內部方塊圖。 發明詳細說明 現在將詳細參考在所附圖式中所示之本發明的實施及 具體寅施例。儘可能地,相同的參考編號將在整個圖式及 以下的說明用來代表相同或類似的部份。 一實際世界的影像被補捉,並儲存在一記憶體裝置中。 所儲存的影像係以一些已知的資料配置來產生。該儲存的 影像可使用一陣列來呈現在一顯示裝置上,其可提供一彩 色顯示器之改進的解析度。該陣列包含複數個三色像素元 件,其具有至少一藍色放射器(或次像素)、一紅色放射器 及一綠色放射器,其在當照射時可混合來產生人眼可看到 的所有其它彩色。Exemplary system for gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering of the I function; Figures 55 to 60 show exemplary circuits that can be used in the processing blocks of Figures 52A, 53A, and 54A; Figure 61 shows timing during sub-pixel rendering Flow chart of a method of black pixels at the edges; FIGS. 62 to 66 show exemplary block diagrams of a system for improving the color resolution of an image on a display; FIGS. 67 to 70 show a function evaluator that performs high-speed mathematical calculations Exemplary specific embodiments; FIG. 71 shows a flowchart of a sub-presentation process with a gamma adjustment method implemented by software; and FIG. 72 shows a software process of implementation of FIGS. 46, 49, and 51 and / or FIG. 71 The internal block diagram of an exemplary computer system. Detailed Description of the Invention Reference will now be made in detail to the implementation and specific embodiments of the present invention illustrated in the accompanying drawings. Wherever possible, the same reference numbers will be used throughout the drawings and the description below to refer to the same or like parts. A real world image is captured and stored in a memory device. The stored images are generated with some known data configurations. The stored image can be presented on a display device using an array, which can provide improved resolution of a color display. The array contains a plurality of three-color pixel elements, which have at least a blue emitter (or sub-pixel), a red emitter, and a green emitter, which can be mixed to produce all visible to the human eye when illuminated. Other colors.

為了決定每個放射器之數值,首先必須產生採用濾波器 核心形式的轉換等式。該濾波器核心係由決定該原始資料 組樣本區域及目標顯示樣本區域的相對區域重疊來產 生。該重疊的比例決定了在該濾波器核心陣列中要使用的 係數值。 為了在該顯示裝置呈現該儲存的影像,該重構點係在每 個三色像素元件中決定。每個重構點的中心亦可為用來重 構該儲存的影像之樣本點的來源。類似地,該影像資料組 的樣本點即可決定。每個重構點係位在該放射器的中心 (例如一紅色放射器的中心在放置該重構點在該放射器 的中心時,一邊界線的格柵即與該重構點的中心成等距地 形成,產生樣本區域(其中該樣本點係位在中心所形成 的格柵產生一磚面圖樣!在該磚面圖樣中可利用的形狀可 包含但不限於正方形、交錯的長方形、三角形、六角形、 八角型、菱型、交錯的正方形、交錯的長方形、交錯的三 角形、交錯的菱型、Penrose磚面、菱形、扭曲的菱形,及 線條,以及包含前述形狀中至少一種之組合。 對於該影像資料及該目標顯示之樣本點及樣本區域已 經決定,其中兩個為重疊。該重叠產生次區域,其中該輸 出樣本區域覆蓋數個输入樣本區域。該輸入對輸出的面積 比例係由檢查或計算決定,並在濾波器核心中儲存成係 數,其數值係用來加權該輸入數值到輸出數值來決定每個 放射器之適當的數值。 當使用充分高的調整比例時,此處所揭示的次像素配置 -18 -In order to determine the value of each emitter, a conversion equation in the form of a filter core must first be generated. The core of the filter is generated by determining the relative area of the original data set sample area and the target display sample area overlap. The overlap ratio determines the coefficient values to be used in the filter core array. In order to present the stored image on the display device, the reconstruction point is determined in each of the three-color pixel elements. The center of each reconstruction point can also be the source of the sample points used to reconstruct the stored image. Similarly, the sample points of the image data set can be determined. Each reconstruction point is located at the center of the radiator (for example, when the center of a red radiator is placed at the center of the radiator, a grid of boundary lines is equal to the center of the reconstruction point, etc. Distance from the ground to generate a sample area (where the sample point is located in the center of the grid to produce a brick pattern! The shapes available in this brick pattern can include, but are not limited to, squares, intersecting rectangles, triangles, Hexagons, octagons, rhombuses, staggered squares, staggered rectangles, staggered triangles, staggered rhombuses, Penrose tiles, rhombuses, twisted rhombuses, and lines, and combinations comprising at least one of the foregoing shapes. The image data and the sample points and sample areas displayed by the target have been determined, two of which are overlapped. The overlap produces a secondary area, where the output sample area covers several input sample areas. The area ratio of the input to output is checked by inspection Or calculate the decision and store it as a coefficient in the filter core. Its value is used to weight the input value to the output value to determine each Appropriate value of the emitter. When using a sufficiently high adjustment ratio, the sub-pixel configuration disclosed here -18-

及呈現方法提供了比先前技藝顯示器要更佳的影像品 質,量測的資訊定址性,及重構的影像調變轉換函數 (MTF)〇 此外,揭示了具有伽瑪值調整之次像素呈現之方法及系 統。資料可對具有彩色次像素之像素的顯示器來處理。特 定言之,像素資料即可接收,並施加伽瑪值調整到由該接 收的像素資料到次像素呈現的資料之轉換。該轉換可對於 一次像素配置來產生該次像素呈現的資料。該次像素配置 可在一水平軸及垂直軸中至少一個之上交替紅色及綠色 次像素,或任何其它配置。該次像素呈現的資料可輸出到 該顯示器。 因為人眼不能夠區別絕對亮度或照度值,其需要改進照 度對比,特別是在高空間頻率,以得到較高品質的影像。 如以下的詳細說明,藉由加入伽瑪調整到次像素呈現,該 照度或亮度對比比例可對於一顯示器上的次像素配置來 改進。因此,藉由改進這種對比比例,可得到較高品質的 影像。該伽瑪調整可對於一給定的次像素配置來精確地控 制。 圖1所示為在先前技藝中,對於一顯示裝置之單一平 面,一陣列中三色像素元件的RGB長條配置,而圖2所示 為圖1之先前技藝的RGB長條配置之有效次像素呈現取樣 點。圖3、4及5所示為對於圖1之先前技藝的RGB長條配置 之取樣點的每個彩色平面之有效次像素呈現取樣區域。圖 1-5將在此處進一步討論。 |I23#ails 年月 日 圖6所示為根據一具體實施例之數個三色像素元件的配 置20。該三色像素元件21為正方形,並置於X、Y座標系 統的原點,且包含一藍色放射器22、兩個紅色放射器24, 及兩個綠色放射器26。該藍色放射器22係置於該中心,垂 直地沿著該座標系統的X軸,並延伸到第一、第二、第三 及第四象限。該紅色放射器24係置於該第二及第四象限, 其並未由該藍色放射器所佔用。該綠色放射器26係置於該 第一及第三象限,其並未被藍色放射器所佔用。該藍色放 射器22為長方形,其側邊對準於該座標系統的X及Y軸, 而該紅色24及綠色26之相對配對通常為正方形。 該陣列係在一面板上重覆,以完成具有一所想要的矩陣 解析度之裝置。該重覆的三色像素元件形成一 ”檢查板”, 其交替了紅色24及綠色26放射器與藍色放射器22,其均勻 分佈在該裝置中,但為該紅色24及綠色26放射器之解析度 的一半。該藍色放射器之每隔一行即交錯,或偏移其長度 的一半,如由放射器28所代表。為了容納這樣的配置,且 因為邊緣效應,一些藍色放射器在邊緣上可能為藍色放射 器28的一半尺寸。 圖7所示為圖6及27之配置的有效次像素呈現取樣點之 配置29,而圖8及9所示為圖6及27之配置的藍色平面取樣 點23之交替的有效次像素呈現取樣區域123、124之配置 30、31。圖7、8及9將在此處進一步討論。 圖10所示為一三色像素元件39之配置38的另一個說明 用具體實施例。該三色像素元件39包含一藍色放射器32、 -20- 123801k ^Ιά 兩個紅色放射器34及兩個綠色放射器36成一正方形。該三 色像素元件39為正方形,其以一 X、Υ座標系統之原點為 中心。該藍色放射器32係以該正方形的原點為中心,並延 伸到該X、Υ座標系統之第一、第二、第三及第四象限。 一對紅色放射器34係置於相對的象限(即第二及第四象 限 >,及一對綠色放射器36係置於相對的象限(即第一及第 三象限 >,佔據了未被該藍色放射器32佔用的該象限的部 份。如圖10所示,該藍色放射器32為菱形,其角落對準於 該座標系統的X及Υ軸,而該紅色34及綠色36之相對配對 通常為正方形,其具有截去的面向內之角落,而形成平行 於該藍色放射器32的側邊。 該陣列係在一面板上重覆,以完成具有一所想要的矩陣 解析度之裝置。該重覆的三色像素形成一,,檢查板”,其交 替了紅色34及綠色36放射器與藍色放射器32,其均勻分佈 在該裝置中,但為該紅色34及綠色36放射器之解析度的一 半。紅色放射器34a及34b將在此處進一步討論。 該三色像素元件之好處為其改進了彩色顯示器之解析 度。此發生係因為僅有紅色及綠色放射器可明顯地貢獻於 感知該照度通道中的高解析度。因此,減少藍色放射器之 數目,並取代一些紅色及綠色放射器,其可改進解析度來 更為緊密地匹配於人類視覺。 區分在該垂直軸中一半的紅色及綠色放射器來增加空 間定址性,可以改進先前技藝中習用的垂直信號彩色長 條。一交替的紅色及綠色放射器之ff檢查板”允許高空間頻 -21 -And the rendering method provides better image quality, measurement information addressability, and reconstructed image modulation conversion function (MTF) than previous technology displays. In addition, it reveals the sub-pixel rendering with gamma adjustment. Methods and systems. The data can be processed on a display with color sub-pixel pixels. In particular, the pixel data can be received, and a gamma value can be applied to adjust the conversion from the received pixel data to the data presented by the sub-pixels. This transformation can be used for a single pixel configuration to generate the data presented by that sub-pixel. The sub-pixel configuration may alternate red and green sub-pixels on at least one of a horizontal axis and a vertical axis, or any other configuration. The data presented by the sub-pixel can be output to the display. Because the human eye cannot distinguish between absolute brightness or illuminance values, it needs to improve illuminance contrast, especially at high spatial frequencies, to get higher quality images. As explained in detail below, by adding gamma adjustment to sub-pixel presentation, the illuminance or brightness contrast ratio can be improved for the sub-pixel configuration on a display. Therefore, by improving this contrast ratio, a higher quality image can be obtained. This gamma adjustment can be precisely controlled for a given sub-pixel configuration. FIG. 1 shows the RGB stripe configuration of three-color pixel elements in an array for a single plane of a display device in the prior art, and FIG. 2 illustrates the effective times of the RGB stripe configuration of the prior art in FIG. 1 The pixels represent sampling points. 3, 4 and 5 show the effective sub-pixel rendering sampling area for each color plane of the sampling points of the RGB stripe arrangement of the prior art of FIG. Figures 1-5 are discussed further here. | I23 # ails year month day Figure 6 shows a configuration 20 of several tri-color pixel elements according to a specific embodiment. The three-color pixel element 21 is square and is placed at the origin of the X, Y coordinate system, and includes a blue radiator 22, two red radiators 24, and two green radiators 26. The blue radiator 22 is placed at the center, extends vertically along the X axis of the coordinate system, and extends to the first, second, third, and fourth quadrants. The red radiator 24 is disposed in the second and fourth quadrants, and is not occupied by the blue radiator. The green radiator 26 is placed in the first and third quadrants, and is not occupied by the blue radiator. The blue radiator 22 is rectangular, and its sides are aligned with the X and Y axes of the coordinate system. The relative pairing of the red 24 and the green 26 is usually square. The array is repeated on a panel to complete a device with a desired matrix resolution. The repeated three-color pixel element forms a "check plate", which alternates the red 24 and green 26 emitters with the blue emitter 22, which are evenly distributed in the device, but the red 24 and green 26 emitter Half the resolution. Every other line of the blue emitter is staggered or offset by half its length, as represented by emitter 28. To accommodate such a configuration, and because of edge effects, some blue radiators may be half the size of the blue radiator 28 on the edges. FIG. 7 shows a configuration 29 of effective sub-pixel rendering sampling points for the configurations of FIGS. 6 and 27, and FIGS. 8 and 9 show alternate effective sub-pixel rendering of the blue plane sampling points 23 for the configurations of FIGS. 6 and 27. The sampling areas 123 and 124 are arranged 30 and 31. Figures 7, 8 and 9 are discussed further here. Fig. 10 shows another embodiment 38 of the arrangement 38 of a three-color pixel element 39. The three-color pixel element 39 includes a blue radiator 32, two red radiators 34, and two green radiators 36 in a square shape. The three-color pixel element 39 is a square, which is centered on the origin of an X and Y coordinate system. The blue emitter 32 is centered on the origin of the square and extends to the first, second, third, and fourth quadrants of the X, Y coordinate system. A pair of red radiators 34 are placed in the opposite quadrants (that is, the second and fourth quadrants), and a pair of green radiators 36 are placed in the opposite quadrants (that is, the first and third quadrants). The part of the quadrant occupied by the blue radiator 32. As shown in FIG. 10, the blue radiator 32 is diamond-shaped, and its corners are aligned with the X and Y axes of the coordinate system, and the red 34 and green The relative pairing of 36 is usually square, with truncated inwardly facing corners, forming sides parallel to the blue emitter 32. The array is repeated on a panel to complete a desired Device for matrix resolution. The repeated three-color pixels form one, check board, which alternates the red 34 and green 36 emitters and the blue emitter 32, which are evenly distributed in the device, but the red Half of the resolution of the 34 and green 36 emitters. The red emitters 34a and 34b will be discussed further here. The benefit of the three-color pixel element is that it improves the resolution of the color display. This occurs because only the red and Green emitters can clearly contribute to perception High resolution in the illuminance channel. Therefore, reducing the number of blue emitters and replacing some red and green emitters can improve the resolution to more closely match human vision. Distinguish half of the vertical axis Red and green emitters to increase spatial addressability can improve the vertical signal color bars used in previous techniques. An alternating red and green emitter ff inspection board allows high spatial frequencies -21-

雛H .1* 夕 —i_&[ 率解析度,以同時增加該水平軸及垂直軸。 為了重構該第一資料格式的影像到該第二資料格式的 顯示器,其需要隔離在每個放射器之幾何中心的重構點, 並產生一取樣格柵。圖11所示為圖10之三色像素元件的配 置38之有效重構點的配置40。該重構點(如圖11之33、35 及37),其以該三色像素元件39中該放射器(分別為圖1〇 之32、35及36)的幾何位置上為中心。該紅色重構點35及 該綠色重構點3 7在該顯示器上形成一紅色及綠色”檢查板 ”陣列。該藍色重構點33係均勻分佈在該裝置上,但為該 紅色35及綠色37重構點之解析度的一半。對於次像素呈 現,三色重構點係視為取樣點,並用來建構每個彩色平面 之有效取樣區域,其係獨立地處理。圖12所示為圖11之重 構陣列的該藍色平面42之有效藍色取樣點46(對應於圖11 之藍色重構點33)及取樣區域44。對於一重構點的正方形 格柵,該最小邊界周界為一正方形格柵。 圖1 3所示為該有效紅色取樣點5 1,其對應於圖1 1之紅色 重構點,及圖7之紅色重構點25,以及該紅色平面48之有 效取樣區域50、52、53及54。該取樣點51形成一正方形格 柵陣列,與該顯示器邊界成45。。因此,在該取樣格柵的 中心陣列內,該取樣區域形成一正方形格柵。由於 ’’ 邊緣效應”,其中該正方形格柵將重疊於該顯示器的邊 界,其形狀可調整來保持相同的面積,並最小化每個樣本 之邊界周長(如54)。檢查該樣本區域將揭示樣本取域5〇 將與樣本區域52具有相同的面積,但是樣本區域54具有稍H.1 * xi —i_ & [rate resolution to increase the horizontal axis and vertical axis at the same time. In order to reconstruct the image in the first data format to the display in the second data format, it is necessary to isolate the reconstruction point at the geometric center of each radiator and generate a sampling grid. Fig. 11 shows an effective reconstruction point arrangement 40 of the arrangement 38 of the three-color pixel element of Fig. 10. The reconstruction point (as shown in 33, 35, and 37 in FIG. 11) is centered on the geometric position of the emitter (in FIGS. 10, 32, 35, and 36) in the three-color pixel element 39. The red reconstruction points 35 and the green reconstruction points 37 form a red and green "check board" array on the display. The blue reconstruction points 33 are evenly distributed on the device, but are half the resolution of the red 35 and green 37 reconstruction points. For sub-pixel rendering, the three-color reconstruction points are treated as sampling points and are used to construct an effective sampling area for each color plane, which are processed independently. Fig. 12 shows the effective blue sampling points 46 (corresponding to the blue reconstruction points 33 of Fig. 11) and the sampling area 44 of the blue plane 42 of the reconstructed array of Fig. 11. For a square grid of reconstruction points, the minimum boundary perimeter is a square grid. FIG. 13 shows the effective red sampling point 51, which corresponds to the red reconstruction point of FIG. 11 and the red reconstruction point 25 of FIG. 7, and the effective sampling areas 50, 52, and 53 of the red plane 48. And 54. The sampling points 51 form a square grid array and are 45 with the display boundary. . Therefore, within the center array of the sampling grid, the sampling area forms a square grid. Due to the "edge effect", where the square grid will overlap the border of the display, its shape can be adjusted to maintain the same area and minimize the boundary perimeter of each sample (such as 54). Checking the sample area will It is revealed that the sample area 50 will have the same area as the sample area 52, but the sample area 54 will have a slightly larger area.

?OIW? OIW

微較大的面積,而在角落中的樣本區域53略小。此對造成 一誤差,其中在該樣本區域53中變化的資料將會超過所代 表的,而在樣本區域54中變化的資料將低於所代表的。但 是,在一數十萬或數百萬放射器之顯示器中,該誤差將為 最小,並在該影像的角落中消失。 圖14所示為該有效綠色取樣點57,其係對應於圖11之綠 色重構點37,及圖7之綠色重構點27,以及該綠色平面60 之有效取樣區域55、56、58及5 9。檢視圖14將發現到其基 本上類似於圖13,具有相同的樣本區域關係,但旋轉180。。 這些放射器及其所得到的樣本點及區域之配置最好可 直接由繪圖軟體使用來產生高品質影像,轉換繪圖元件或 向量來偏移彩色樣本平面,結合了先前技藝的取樣技術及 該取樣點及區域。完整的繪圖顯示系統,例如攜帶式電子 設備、膝上型及桌上型電腦,及電視/視訊系統,其較佳 地是使用平板顯示器及這些資料格式。所使用的顯示器形 式可包含但不限於液晶顯示器、減法顯示器、電漿面板顯 示器、冷光(EL)顯示器、電泳顯示器、場放射器顯示器、 離散發光二極體顯不器、有機發光二極體(QLED)顯示器、 投影機、陰極射線管(CRT)顯示器及類似者,及包含前述 顯不器中至少一種之組合。但是,目午多所安裝的繪圖基礎 及繪圖軟體使用一先前的資料樣本格式其原始係基於使 用CRT做為重構顯示器。 圖15所示為一樣本點74之陣列,及其為先前技藝像素資 料格式70之有效樣本區域72,其中該紅色、綠色及藍色值 ea 係在一相等空間解析度格柵及重合。在先前技藝顯示系統 中,此資料形式係在一平板顯示器上重構,其僅藉由使用 來自圖1所示之形式的一先前技藝RGB長條面板上每個彩 色平面之資料。在圖丨中,每個彩色次像素之解析度係相 同於該樣本點,並將三個次像素視為一列,雖然其構成一 單一結合及攙雜的多重彩色像素,而忽略了每個彩色次像 素之實際的重構點位置。在該技藝中,此通常稱之為該顯 示器的”本質模式”。此會浪費該次像素之位置資訊,特別 是該紅色及綠色。 相反地,本申請案的输入RGB資料係視為彼此重叠的三 個平面。為了由該RGB格式轉換資料,每個平面係獨立地 處理。在本申請案的更有效率之次像素配置上來自原始的 先前技藝格式之顯示資訊需要經由重新取樣來轉換該資 料格式。該資料係重新取樣,其方式為每個樣本點的輸出 為該輸入資料的一加權函數。根據分離資料樣本之空間頻 率,該加權函數可在每個输出樣本點處為相同或相異,如 以下所述。 圖16所示為圖15之樣本點覆蓋在圖11之次像素呈現的 樣本點33、35及37上之配置76,其中圖15的樣本點74係與 圖11之紅色(紅色重構點35)及綠色(綠色重構點37) ”檢查 板”陣列具有相同的空間解析度格柵並重合。 圖17所示為圖15之樣本點74,及其覆蓋在圖12的藍色平 面取樣點46上的有效樣本區域72之配置78,其中圖15的樣 本點74係與圖11之紅色(紅色重構點35)及綠色(綠色重構 -24- I2J80i l· 點3 7)”檢查板,,陣列具有相同的空間解析度格柵並重合。 圖17將在此處進一步討論。 圖18所示為樣本點74的陣列80,及其覆蓋在該紅色平面 取樣點35,及圖13之紅色取樣區域50、52、53及54之上的 圖15之有效樣本區域72,其中圖15的樣本點74係在與圖11 之紅色(紅色重構點35)及綠色(綠色重構點37)之 ,,檢 查板”陣列具有相同的空間解析度格柵並重合。該正方形 樣本區域52的內部陣列完全覆蓋了該重合的原始取樣點 74及其取樣區域82,並延伸覆蓋每個在該樣本區域52內的 周圍樣本區域84的四分之一。為了決定該演算法,該輸出 樣本區域50、52、53或54覆蓋或重疊在該輸入樣本區域72 上的比例即被記錄,然後乘以相對應樣本點74的數值,並 施加到該輸出樣本區域3 5。在圖18中,該正方形樣本區域 52的區域,由中央或重合的輸入樣本區域84所填入,其為 該正方形樣本區域52的一半。因此,該相對應樣本點74 的數值即乘以二分之一(或0.5)。藉由檢查,由每個周圍 非重合輸入區域84所填入的正方形樣本區域52的區域,其 每個為八分之一(或0.125)。因此,該相對應的四個输入 樣本點74之數值即乘以八分之一(或〇.125)。然後這些數 值加入到先前的數值(例如乘以〇. 5)來找出一給定樣本點 35之最後输出數值。 對於該邊緣樣本點3 5及其五個側邊樣本區域5 0,該重合 输入樣本區域82係完全地覆蓋,如上述之例,但僅有三個 周圍的输入樣本區域8 4、86及92為重疊。該重疊的輸入樣 -25- 本區域84之一代表該输出樣本區域50之八分之一。沿著該 邊緣之相鄰的輸入樣本區域86及92代表每個該輸出區域 的十六分之三(3/16=0.1875)。如前所述,來自該重疊的樣本 區域72之输入值74之加權值即加入,以得到該樣本點3 5 的數值。 該角落及”接近”角落皆視為相同。因為該角落53及”接 近,,角落54的影像區域覆蓋的區域不同於該中央區域52及 邊緣區域50,該输入樣本區域86、88、90、92、94、96 及98的加權將正比於前述的输入樣本區域82、84、86及92 而不同。對於較小的角落输出樣本區域53,該重合的輸入 樣本區域94覆蓋了输出樣本區域53的七分之四(或約 0.5714)。該相鄰的輸入樣本區域96覆蓋了該输出樣本區域 5 3的十四分之三(或約0.2143)。對於該,’接近”角落樣本區域 54,該重合輸入樣本區域90覆蓋了該輸出樣本區域54的十 七分之八(或約0.4706)。該內部相鄰樣本區域98覆蓋了該 輸出樣本區域54的十七分之二(或約〇·1Π6)〇該邊緣性相鄰 輸入樣本區域92覆蓋了該輸出樣本區域54的十七分之三 (或約0.1765)。該角落输入樣本區域88覆蓋了該输出樣本 區域54的十七分之四(或約0.2353)。如前所述,來自該重 疊的樣本區域72之输入數值74之加權值即加入,以得到該 樣本點35之數值。 對於該綠色平面的重新取樣之計算係以類似的方式進 行,但該輸出樣本陣列旋轉了 180°。 為了重新敘述,該紅色樣本點35及綠色樣本點37數值 -26- ν_之計算如下: 中央區域:A slightly larger area, while the sample area 53 in the corner is slightly smaller. This pair causes an error in which the data that changes in the sample area 53 will exceed what is represented, and the data that changes in the sample area 54 will be lower than that represented. However, in a display with hundreds of thousands or millions of emitters, the error will be minimal and disappear in the corners of the image. FIG. 14 shows the effective green sampling point 57, which corresponds to the green reconstruction point 37 of FIG. 11, the green reconstruction point 27 of FIG. 7, and the effective sampling areas 55, 56, 58 of the green plane 60 and 5 9. The inspection view 14 will find that it is basically similar to FIG. 13 with the same sample region relationship, but rotated 180 degrees. . The configuration of these emitters and the sample points and areas obtained by them can be used directly by the drawing software to generate high-quality images, and the drawing elements or vectors are converted to offset the color sample plane. It combines the sampling technology of the prior art and the sampling. Points and areas. Complete graphics display systems, such as portable electronic devices, laptop and desktop computers, and television / video systems, preferably use flat panel displays and these data formats. The display form used may include, but is not limited to, a liquid crystal display, a subtraction display, a plasma panel display, a cold light (EL) display, an electrophoretic display, a field emitter display, a discrete light emitting diode display, an organic light emitting diode ( A QLED) display, a projector, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display, and the like, and a combination including at least one of the foregoing displays. However, the drawing foundation and drawing software installed by Mu Wu Duo uses a previous data sample format, which was originally based on the use of a CRT as a reconstructed display. FIG. 15 shows an array of the same point 74 and the valid sample area 72 of the prior art pixel data format 70, where the red, green, and blue values ea are in an equal spatial resolution grid and coincide. In the prior art display system, this data format was reconstructed on a flat panel display by using only data from each color plane on a prior art RGB strip panel of the format shown in FIG. In the figure, the resolution of each color sub-pixel is the same as that of the sample point, and the three sub-pixels are regarded as a column, although it constitutes a single combined and mixed multi-color pixel, and each color sub-pixel is ignored. Pixel's actual reconstruction point position. In the art, this is commonly referred to as the "essential mode" of the display. This will waste the position information of the sub-pixel, especially the red and green. In contrast, the input RGB data of this application are considered as three planes overlapping each other. To convert data from this RGB format, each plane is processed independently. Display information from the original prior art format on the more efficient sub-pixel configuration of this application requires resampling to convert the data format. The data is resampled in such a way that the output of each sample point is a weighted function of the input data. The weighting function can be the same or different at each output sample point based on the spatial frequency of the separated data samples, as described below. FIG. 16 shows the arrangement 76 of the sample points of FIG. 15 over the sample points 33, 35, and 37 of the sub-pixel presentation of FIG. 11, where the sample point 74 of FIG. 15 is in red with the red (red reconstruction point 35) of FIG. ) And green (green reconstruction point 37) "check board" arrays have the same spatial resolution grid and coincide. FIG. 17 shows the sample point 74 of FIG. 15 and the configuration 78 of the effective sample area 72 covering the blue plane sampling point 46 of FIG. 12, where the sample point 74 of FIG. 15 is the same as the red (red Reconstruction point 35) and green (green reconstruction -24- I2J80i l · point 3 7) "inspection board, the arrays have the same spatial resolution grid and coincide. Figure 17 will be further discussed here. Figure 18 Shown as an array 80 of sample points 74, and the red sample area 35, and the effective sample area 72 of FIG. 15 over the red sample areas 50, 52, 53, and 54 of FIG. 13, where the sample of FIG. 15 The point 74 is the same as the red (red reconstructed point 35) and green (green reconstructed point 37) of FIG. 11, the "check board" array has the same spatial resolution grid and coincides. The inner array of the square sample area 52 completely covers the coincident original sampling point 74 and its sampling area 82, and extends to cover a quarter of each of the surrounding sample areas 84 within the sample area 52. In order to determine the algorithm, the proportion of the output sample area 50, 52, 53 or 54 that covers or overlaps the input sample area 72 is recorded, then multiplied by the value corresponding to the sample point 74, and applied to the output sample Area 3 5. In Fig. 18, the area of the square sample area 52 is filled by the central or coincident input sample area 84, which is half of the square sample area 52. Therefore, the value of the corresponding sample point 74 is multiplied by one-half (or 0.5). By inspection, the area of the square sample area 52 filled by each surrounding non-overlapping input area 84 is each one-eighth (or 0.125). Therefore, the value of the corresponding four input sample points 74 is multiplied by one-eighth (or 0.125). These values are then added to the previous value (eg, multiplied by 0.5) to find the final output value for a given sample point 35. For the edge sample point 3 5 and its five side sample areas 50, the coincident input sample area 82 is completely covered, as in the above example, but only three surrounding input sample areas 8 4, 86, and 92 are overlapping. The overlapping input sample -25- one of the regions 84 represents one-eighth of the output sample region 50. Adjacent input sample regions 86 and 92 along the edge represent three-sixteenths (3/16 = 0.1875) of each of the output regions. As mentioned earlier, the weighted value of the input value 74 from the overlapping sample area 72 is added to obtain the value of the sample point 3 5. This corner and the "close" corner are considered the same. Because the corner 53 and the "close", the image area of the corner 54 covers an area different from the central area 52 and the edge area 50. The weighting of the input sample areas 86, 88, 90, 92, 94, 96, and 98 will be proportional to The aforementioned input sample areas 82, 84, 86, and 92 differ. For smaller corner output sample areas 53, the coincident input sample area 94 covers four-sevenths (or about 0.5714) of the output sample area 53. The The adjacent input sample area 96 covers three-fourteenths (or about 0.2143) of the output sample area 53. For this, 'close' to the corner sample area 54, the coincident input sample area 90 covers the output sample area Eighty-seventeenths of 54 (or about 0.4706). The internal adjacent sample region 98 covers two-seventeenths (or about 0.16) of the output sample region 54. The marginal adjacent input sample region 92 covers three-seventeenths of the output sample region 54. (Or about 0.1765). The corner input sample area 88 covers four-seventeenths (or about 0.2353) of the output sample area 54. As mentioned above, the weighted value of the input value 74 from the overlapping sample area 72 is added to obtain the value of the sample point 35. The resampling of the green plane is calculated in a similar manner, but the output sample array is rotated by 180 °. To restate, the values of the red sample point 35 and the green sample point 37 -26- ν_ are calculated as follows: The central area:

Vout(CxRy)=0.5_Vin(CxRy)+0.125 一 V^CxqRyhO.US—Vin (CxRy+1)+0.125—Vin(Cx+1Ry)+0.125—VJCxRy]) 下方邊緣:Vout (CxRy) = 0.5_Vin (CxRy) +0.125-V ^ CxqRyhO.US—Vin (CxRy + 1) + 0.125—Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + 0.125—VJCxRy]) The lower edge:

Vout(CxRy)=0.5_Vin(CxRy)+0.1875^(0,.^^0.1875_Vin (CxRy+1)+0.125_Vin(Cx+1Ry)Vout (CxRy) = 0.5_Vin (CxRy) + 0.1875 ^ (0,. ^^ 0.1875_Vin (CxRy + 1) + 0.125_Vin (Cx + 1Ry)

上方邊緣:Top edge:

VoutiC.RO^O.5^,(0^0+0.1875^(0,.^0+0.125^ (CXR2)+0.1875—VJCx+A) 右方邊緣:VoutiC.RO ^ O.5 ^, (0 ^ 0 + 0.1875 ^ (0,. ^ 0 + 0.125 ^ (CXR2) + 0.1875—VJCx + A) Right edge:

Vout(CxRy)=0.5^(0^)+0.125^(^^^0.1875^ (0^0+0.1875^(0^.0 左方邊緣:Vout (CxRy) = 0.5 ^ (0 ^) + 0.125 ^ (^^^ 0.1875 ^ (0 ^ 0 + 0.1875 ^ (0 ^ .0) Left edge:

VoutiC^^O.5^,(0^^+0.1875^(0^^0+0.125^ (C2Ry)+0.1875—乂以。〜) 右上角:VoutiC ^^ O.5 ^, (0 ^^ + 0.1875 ^ (0 ^^ 0 + 0.125 ^ (C2Ry) + 0.1875— 乂 以. ~) Upper right corner:

Vout(CxRy)=0.5714_Vin(CxRy)+0.2143—VJCwRyH 0.2143_Vin(CxRy+1) 左上角:Vout (CxRy) = 0.5714_Vin (CxRy) + 0.2143—VJCwRyH 0.2143_Vin (CxRy + 1) Upper left corner:

VoJQR^OMH—Vin(C1R1)+0.2143_Vin(C1R2)+ 0.2143_Vin(C2Ri) 左下角: V0Ut(CxRy)二 0.5714_Vin(CxRy)+0.2143—Vin(Cx+1Ry)+ -27-VoJQR ^ OMH—Vin (C1R1) + 0.2143_Vin (C1R2) + 0.2143_Vin (C2Ri) Bottom left corner: V0Ut (CxRy) Two 0.5714_Vin (CxRy) + 0.2143—Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + -27-

0.2143^(0^,^) 右下角: V〇ut(CxRy)=0.5714^(0^)+0.2143^(0,^^)+ 0.2143^(0^.0 上方邊緣,左方接近角落: V〇ut(C2R1)=0.4706_Vin(C2R1)+0.2353_Vin(C1R1)+0.11760.2143 ^ (0 ^, ^) Bottom right corner: V〇ut (CxRy) = 0.5714 ^ (0 ^) + 0.2143 ^ (0, ^^) + 0.2143 ^ (0 ^ .0 Above the edge, the left is close to the corner: V 〇ut (C2R1) = 0.4706_Vin (C2R1) + 0.2353_Vin (C1R1) +0.1176

Vin(C2R2)+0.1765_Vin(C3Ri) 左方邊緣,上方接近角落:Vin (C2R2) + 0.1765_Vin (C3Ri) Left edge, close to corner above:

Vout(C1R2)=0.4706_Vin(C1R2)+0.1765_Vin(C1R3)+0.1176 Vin(C2R2)+0.2353^(0^0 左方邊緣,下方接近角落: V〇ut(C1Ry)=0.4706_Vin(C1Ry)+0.2353_Vin(C1Ry+1)+ 0.1176^^02^)+0.1765^(01^.0 下方邊緣,左方接近角落:Vout (C1R2) = 0.4706_Vin (C1R2) + 0.1765_Vin (C1R3) +0.1176 Vin (C2R2) + 0.2353 ^ (0 ^ 0 Left edge, close to the corner below: V〇ut (C1Ry) = 0.4706_Vin (C1Ry) + 0.2353_Vin (C1Ry + 1) + 0.1176 ^^ 02 ^) + 0.1765 ^ (01 ^ .0 bottom edge, left corner close to corner:

Vout(C2Ry)=0.4706—Vin(C2Ry)+0.2353—ViJC^RyH 0.1765_Vin(C3Ry)+〇. 1176^,,(02^.0 下方邊緣,右方接近角落:Vout (C2Ry) = 0.4706—Vin (C2Ry) + 0.2353—ViJC ^ RyH 0.1765_Vin (C3Ry) + 〇. 1176 ^ ,, (02 ^ .0 below the edge, the right is close to the corner:

Vout(CxRy)==0.4706_Vin(CxRy)+0.1765^(0,^^)+ 0.2353^(0^^,)+0.1176^(0^0 右方邊緣,下方接近角落:Vout (CxRy) == 0.4706_Vin (CxRy) + 0.1765 ^ (0, ^^) + 0.2353 ^ (0 ^^,) + 0.1176 ^ (0 ^ 0 The right edge, below the corner:

Vout(CxRy)=0.4706—Vin(CxRy)+0.1176_Vin(Cx_1Ry)+ 0.2353^(0^0+0.1765^(0^.0 右方邊緣,上方接近角落:Vout (CxRy) = 0.4706—Vin (CxRy) + 0.1176_Vin (Cx_1Ry) + 0.2353 ^ (0 ^ 0 + 0.1765 ^ (0 ^ .0 right edge, close to corner above:

Vout(CxR2)=0.4706_Vin(CxRy)+0.1176_Vin(Cx-1R2)+ -28- 丨复Vout (CxR2) = 0.4706_Vin (CxRy) + 0.1176_Vin (Cx-1R2) + -28- 丨 complex

纖J 0.1765^(0^)+0.2353^(0^0 上方邊緣,右方接近角落:Fiber J 0.1765 ^ (0 ^) + 0.2353 ^ (0 ^ 0 Upper edge, right corner close to corner:

VoJCxR^OJTi^—Vin(CxR1)+0.1765_Vin(Cx_1R1)+ 0.1176 一 ^((^2)+0.2353-^) 其中Vin僅為位在CxRy處該次像素之色彩的色差值(CXR 表紅色34及綠色36次像素之第X行,而Ry代表紅色34及綠 色36次像素的第y列,因此CxRy代表位在該顯示面板之第X 行及第y列之紅色34或綠色36次像素放射器,由左上角開 始,如一般的作法)。 其很重要地是要注意到,在每個等式中的係數加權之總 和最多是加到1。雖然有17個等式來計算完整的影像轉 換,由於該對稱性,僅有四組係數。此可在實施時降低其 複雜性。 如前所述,圖17所示為圖15之樣本點74,及其覆蓋在圖 12的藍色平面取樣點46上的有效樣本區域72之配置78,其 中圖15的樣本點74係與圖11之紅色(紅色重構點35)及綠 色(綠色重構點37)”檢查板”陣列具有相同的空間解析度 格柵並重合。圖12的藍色樣本點46允許由檢查來決定藍色 樣本區域44。在此例中,現在該藍色樣本區域44為一藍色 重新取樣區域,其僅為該原始資料樣本點74之周圍藍色數 值之算術平均,其係計算為該重新取樣的影像之樣本點46 之數值。 該樣本點46的藍色輸出數值V_係計算如下: V〇ut(Cx+_Ry+)=0.25_Vin(CxRy)+〇.25_Viri(CxRy+1)+VoJCxR ^ OJTi ^ -Vin (CxR1) + 0.1765_Vin (Cx_1R1) + 0.1176 a ^ ((^ 2) + 0.2353- ^) where Vin is only the color difference value of the color of the sub-pixel at CxRy (CXR indicates red 34th and green 36th pixels in the Xth row, and Ry represents red 34 and green 36th pixels in the yth column, so CxRy represents red 34 or green 36th pixels in the Xth and y columns of the display panel The radiator, starting from the upper left corner, as usual. It is important to note that the sum of the coefficient weights in each equation is added up to one at most. Although there are 17 equations to calculate the complete image transformation, due to this symmetry, there are only four sets of coefficients. This can reduce its complexity when implemented. As mentioned above, FIG. 17 shows the sample point 74 of FIG. 15 and the configuration 78 of the effective sample area 72 covering the blue plane sampling point 46 of FIG. The red (red reconstruction point 35) and green (green reconstruction point 37) "check board" arrays of 11 have the same spatial resolution grid and coincide. The blue sample point 46 of Fig. 12 allows the blue sample area 44 to be determined by inspection. In this example, the blue sample area 44 is now a blue resampled area, which is only the arithmetic average of the blue values around the original data sample point 74, which is calculated as the sample point of the resampled image The value of 46. The blue output value V_ of the sample point 46 is calculated as follows: V〇ut (Cx + _Ry +) = 0.25_Vin (CxRy) + 0.25.Viri (CxRy + 1) +

年月 Ej 0.25_Vin(Cx+1Ry)+0.25_Vin(Cx+1Ry+1) 其中Vin為該周圍输入樣本點74之藍色色差值,Cx代表樣 本點74之第X行,而Ry代表樣本點74的第y列,由左上角開 始,如同一般的作法。 對於藍色次像素的計算,X及Y數值必須為奇數,如同 每對紅色及綠色次像素僅有一藍色次像素。再次地,該係 數加權的總和係等於數值1。 該紅色樣本點35之中央區域等式的係數之加權,其影響 了大多數產生的影像,並施加於該中央重新取樣區域52, 其為二進制偏移除法之處理,其中0.5為向”右”偏移一個 位元,0.25為向,,右π偏移兩個位元,而0.125為向,’右ff偏移 三個位元。因此,該演算法相當地簡單及快速,其僅牽涉 到簡單的偏移除法及加法。為了最大的準確性及速度,周 圍像素之相加必須先完成,接著向右偏移一單一三個位 元,然後加入該單一位元偏移的中央值。但是,後者對於 在邊緣及角落處的紅色及綠色樣本區域之等式牽涉到更 複雜的乘法。在一小型顯示器上(如具有總共數個像素的 顯示器),其需要一更為複雜的等式來保證良好的影像品 質顯示。對於較大的影像或顯示器,其中在該邊緣及角落 處的小誤差無關緊要,其可進行簡化。對於此簡化,該紅 色及綠色平面之第一等式係應用在邊緣及角落,而在該影 像的邊緣上具有”遺失”的输入資料樣本點,使得输入樣本 點74係設定等於該重合输入樣本點74。另外,該”遺失” 數值可設定為黑色。此演算法可簡易地實施在軟體、韌體 -30-Year and month Ej 0.25_Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + 0.25_Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1) where Vin is the blue color difference value of the surrounding input sample point 74, Cx represents the X line of sample point 74, and Ry represents the sample point The y-th column of 74 starts from the upper left corner, as usual. For the calculation of blue sub-pixels, the X and Y values must be odd, as if each pair of red and green sub-pixels has only one blue sub-pixel. Again, the coefficient-weighted sum is equal to the value 1. The weighting of the coefficients of the central region equation of the red sample point 35 affects most of the generated images and is applied to the central resampling region 52, which is the processing of binary offset division, where 0.5 is to the "right" Offset by one bit, 0.25 is the direction, right π is offset by two bits, and 0.125 is the direction, 'right ff is offset by three bits. Therefore, the algorithm is relatively simple and fast, it only involves simple offset division and addition. For maximum accuracy and speed, the addition of the surrounding pixels must be completed first, then shifted to the right by a single three bits, and then the central value of the single bit offset is added. However, the latter involves more complex multiplications for the equations of the red and green sample areas at the edges and corners. On a small display (such as a display with a few pixels in total), it requires a more complicated equation to ensure good image quality display. For larger images or displays, where small errors at the edges and corners are irrelevant, they can be simplified. For this simplification, the first equations of the red and green planes are applied to edges and corners, and there are "missing" input data sample points on the edges of the image, so that the input sample point 74 is set equal to the coincident input sample Point 74. In addition, the "missing" value can be set to black. This algorithm can be easily implemented in software, firmware -30-

或硬體。 圖19及20所示為樣本點74的另外兩種配置100、102,及 覆蓋在圖8及9之藍色平面取樣區域23上的圖15之有效樣 本區域72,其中圖15的該樣本點74係與圖7之紅色及綠色" 檢查板”陣列具有相同的空間解析度格柵並重合。圖8所示 為該有效次像素呈現取樣區域123,其對於圖6之放射器配 置,具有如圖7所示之藍色平面取樣點23之最小的邊界周 長。 計算該係數的方法之進行如上所述。覆蓋了圖19之每個 輸入樣本區域72之输出樣本區域123的比例性重叠經過計 算,並做為一轉換等式或濾波器核心之係數。這些係數係 在以下的轉換等式中乘以該樣本值74: Vout(Cx+_RY+_)=0.015625—Vin(Cx_1Ry)+0.234375_Vin (CxRy)+0.234375—Vin(Cx+1Ry)+0.015625 一 Vin(Cx+2Ry)+ 0.015625^((^1^)+0.234375^(^1^)+ 0.234375_Vin(Cx+1Ry+1)H-0.015625_Vin(Cx+2Ry+1) 本技藝之專業人士可找出方法來快速地執行這些計 算。舉例而言,該係數0.015625係等於向右偏移6個位元。 在圖15之樣本點74與圖7之紅色(紅色重構點25)及綠色 (綠色重構點27)之”檢查板”陣列具有相同的空間解析度 格柵及重合的情況下,此最小邊界條件區域會造成增加的 計算負擔,以及將該資料展開到6個樣本點74。 圖9之另一種有效輸出樣本區域124配置31可用於一些 應用或場合。舉例而言,對於圖15之樣本點74係與圖7之 -31 - 紅色(紅色重構點25)及綠色(綠色重構點27)”檢查板”陣列 具有相同的空間解析度格栅並重合時,或該输入樣本區域 74及輸出樣本區域之間的關係如圖20所示時,該計算較為 簡單。在該偶數行中,計算該藍色输出樣本點23之公式係 相同於上述圖1 7中所開發的公式。在該奇數行中,圖20 之計算如下: V〇ut(Cx+_Ry_)=0.25_Vin(CxRy)+0.25_Vin(Cx+1Ry)+0.25__Vin (CxU+0.25—Vin(Cx+1Ry·。 如同一般的作法,以上圖19及20之計算係對於該中央樣 本區域124之一般性狀況來完成。在該邊緣處的計算將需 要修正關於在偏離該螢幕的邊緣之樣本點74之數值的轉 換公式或假設,如上所述。 現在請參考圖21,係說明一先前技藝之像素資料格式之 樣本點122之陣列104及其有效樣本區域120。圖2 1所示為具 有相等空間解析度格柵及重合的紅色、綠色及藍色數值, 但是其與圖15所示之影像尺寸具有不同的影像尺寸。 圖22所示為一樣本點122之陣列106,及覆蓋在圖13之紅 色平面取樣區域50、52、53及54上的圖21之有效樣本區域 12 0。圖21之樣本點122分別並未與圖7或11之紅色(紅色重 構點25、35)及綠色(綠色重構點27、37)”檢查板,,陣列具 有相同的空間解析度格柵,亦並未重合。 在圖22的配置中,並不允許對於每個輸出樣本3 5進行單 一簡化的轉換等式計算。然而,一般化基於該所覆蓋的比 例區域而用於產生每個計算之方法皆有可能且實用。此係 -32-Or hardware. 19 and 20 show two other configurations 100, 102 of the sample point 74, and the effective sample area 72 of FIG. 15 overlaid on the blue plane sampling area 23 of FIGS. 8 and 9, where the sample point of FIG. 15 The 74 series has the same spatial resolution grid as the red and green "inspection board" array of FIG. 7 and coincides. FIG. 8 shows the effective sub-pixel rendering sampling area 123. For the radiator configuration of FIG. 6, it has The smallest boundary perimeter of the blue plane sampling point 23 shown in Fig. 7. The method of calculating the coefficient is performed as described above. The proportional overlap of the output sample area 123 covering each input sample area 72 of Fig. 19 It is calculated and used as the coefficient of a conversion equation or filter core. These coefficients are multiplied by the sample value 74 in the following conversion equation: Vout (Cx + _RY + _) = 0.015625—Vin (Cx_1Ry) + 0.234375_Vin (CxRy) + 0.234375—Vin (Cx + 1Ry) +0.015625 One Vin (Cx + 2Ry) + 0.015625 ^ ((^ 1 ^) + 0.234375 ^ (^ 1 ^) + 0.234375_Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1) H-0.015625_Vin (Cx + 2Ry + 1) Those skilled in the art can find ways to perform these calculations quickly. For example, the coefficient is 0.01562 5 is equal to 6 bits offset to the right. The sample point 74 in FIG. 15 has the same space as the red (red reconstruction point 25) and green (green reconstruction point 27) arrays in FIG. In the case of resolution grid and coincidence, this minimum boundary condition region will cause an increased computational burden, and expand the data to 6 sample points 74. Another effective output sample region 124 configuration 31 of Figure 9 can be used in some applications Or occasion. For example, the sample point 74 in FIG. 15 has the same spatial resolution as the red (red reconstruction point 25) and green (green reconstruction point 27) "check board" arrays in Figure 7-31. When the grids are coincident, or the relationship between the input sample area 74 and the output sample area is shown in Figure 20, the calculation is relatively simple. In the even row, the formula for calculating the blue output sample point 23 is the same The formula developed in Figure 17 above. In this odd line, the calculation in Figure 20 is as follows: V〇ut (Cx + _Ry _) = 0.25_Vin (CxRy) + 0.25_Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + 0.25__Vin (CxU + 0.25—Vin (Cx + 1Ry ·. As usual, the calculations in Figures 19 and 20 above are for The general condition of the central sample area 124 is completed. The calculation at the edge will require correction of the conversion formula or assumptions regarding the value of the sample point 74 at the edge of the screen, as described above. Now refer to FIG. 21, The array 104 and the effective sample area 120 of the sample points 122 in the pixel data format of the prior art are described. Figure 21 shows a grid with equal spatial resolution and overlapping red, green, and blue values, but it has a different image size than the image size shown in Figure 15. Fig. 22 shows the array 106 of the same point 122 and the effective sample area 120 of Fig. 21 overlaid on the red plane sampling areas 50, 52, 53 and 54 of Fig. 13. The sample points 122 in FIG. 21 are not the same as the red (red reconstruction points 25, 35) and green (green reconstruction points 27, 37) "inspection boards in Fig. 7 or 11, respectively. The array has the same spatial resolution grid. In the configuration of Figure 22, it is not allowed to perform a single simplified conversion equation calculation for each output sample 35. However, the generalization is used to generate each calculation based on the covered proportional area. All methods are possible and practical. This is -32-

123101ΜI rj: 因為對於任何給定的輸入對輸出影像之比例,特別是在業 界常用而成為標準者,皆可成立,其將具有最小公分母比 例,其將可造成該影像轉換成為一重覆的單元圖樣。由於 對稱性而可進一步降低複雜性,如以上對於重合的输入及 输出陣列所示。當結合時,該重覆的三色樣本點122及對 稱性,造成可降低該唯一係數的組合數目到一更可管理的 程度。 舉例而言,該商用標準顯示器彩色影像格式稱之為 “VGA”(其做為視訊繪圖卡的標準,但現在僅代表 640x480),其具有640行及480列。此格式需要被重新取樣或 調整來顯不在圖10所示之配置的一面板上,其具有400個 紅色次像素34,及400個綠色次像素36(對於總共800個次像 素),及最低600個總共的次像素35及36。此可造成一输入 像素到輸出次像素比例為4到5。每個紅色次像素34及每個 綠色次像素36的轉換等式可由圖22之输入樣本區域120對 該樣本输出區域52之部份覆蓋率來計算。此程序係類似於 圖18之轉換等式的發展,除了該轉換等式似乎對於每個單 一输出樣本點35有所不同。幸運地是,如果進行計算,所 有這些轉換等式會出現一種圖樣。在一列上會重覆地出現 相同的5個轉換等式,而每下一行會重覆另一個5個等式的 圖樣。其最後結果是在此例中,一像素對次像素比例為4 : 5 的情況,僅有5x5或25組唯一的等式組合。此可降低該獨 特的計算成為25組係數。在這些係數中,可發現到其它的 對稱圖樣,其可降低係數組合的總數到僅有6個獨特組 -33- 汾‘哨H E] 合。相同的程序將對於圖6之配置20產生一相同的係數組 合。 以下為一個範例,其描述如何使用上述的幾何方法來計 算該係數。圖32所示為來自前例之一單一 5x5重覆單元 202,其轉換一 650x480 VGA格式影像到具有總共800x600個紅 色及綠色次像素之Pen Tile矩陣。每個由實線206所包圍的該 正方形次像素204代表必須具有一組計算的係數之紅色或 綠色次像素之位置。如果沒有對稱時,此將需要計算25 組的係數。圖32將在稍後詳細地討論。 圖33所示為該係數之對稱性。如果該係數係寫在產業中 所使用的濾波器核心之通用的矩陣形式,該次像素216之 濾波器核心將為一鏡射影像,該次像素218之核心由左翻 到右。此對於在對稱線220之右側上所有的次像素皆為 真,其每個具有一濾波器核心,其為一相對次像素之濾波 器核心的鏡射影像。此外,次像素222具有一濾波器核心, 其為一鏡射影像,其由次像素218的濾波器核心由上翻到 下。此對於對稱線224之下所有其它的濾波器核心亦為 真,其每個為一相對次像素濾波器之鏡射影像。最後,該 次像素226之濾波器核心為一次像素228之濾波器之鏡射影 像,其在一對角線上翻轉。此對於在該對稱線230的右上 方的所有次像素為真,其濾波器為相對於次像素濾波器之 對角線的濾波器之對角線鏡射影像。最後,在該對角線上 的濾波器核心為內部對角線對稱,其具有在對稱線230的 對角線相對側上之相同的係數值。一完整的濾波器核心之123101MI rj: Because for any given input-to-output image ratio, especially those that are commonly used in the industry to become standard, it can be established, it will have the smallest common denominator ratio, which will cause the image to be converted into a repeated unit pattern. Complexity can be further reduced due to symmetry, as shown above for coincident input and output arrays. When combined, the repeated three-color sample points 122 and symmetry cause the number of combinations of the unique coefficients to be reduced to a more manageable level. For example, this commercial standard display color image format is called "VGA" (it is the standard for video graphics cards, but now it only represents 640x480), which has 640 rows and 480 columns. This format needs to be resampled or adjusted to appear on a panel in the configuration shown in Figure 10. It has 400 red sub-pixels 34, and 400 green sub-pixels 36 (for a total of 800 sub-pixels), and a minimum of 600. A total of 35 and 36 sub-pixels. This can result in an input pixel to output subpixel ratio of 4 to 5. The conversion equation of each red sub-pixel 34 and each green sub-pixel 36 can be calculated from the partial coverage of the input sample area 120 of FIG. 22 to the sample output area 52. This procedure is similar to the development of the conversion equation of Fig. 18, except that the conversion equation seems to be different for each single output sample point 35. Fortunately, if these calculations are performed, a pattern appears for all these conversion equations. The same 5 transformation equations are repeated on one column, and the pattern of the other 5 equations is repeated on each next row. The final result is that in this example, there is only 5x5 or 25 unique equation combinations for a case where the ratio of one pixel to sub-pixels is 4: 5. This reduces this unique calculation to 25 sets of coefficients. Among these coefficients, other symmetrical patterns can be found, which can reduce the total number of coefficient combinations to only 6 unique groups. The same procedure will produce an identical combination of coefficients for the configuration 20 of FIG. The following is an example that describes how to calculate this coefficient using the geometric method described above. Figure 32 shows a single 5x5 repeating unit 202 from the previous example, which converts a 650x480 VGA format image to a Pen Tile matrix with a total of 800x600 red and green sub-pixels. Each square sub-pixel 204 surrounded by a solid line 206 represents the location of a red or green sub-pixel which must have a set of calculated coefficients. If there is no symmetry, this will require the calculation of 25 sets of coefficients. Figure 32 will be discussed in detail later. Figure 33 shows the symmetry of this coefficient. If the coefficient is written in the general matrix form of the filter core used in the industry, the filter core of the sub-pixel 216 will be a mirror image, and the core of the sub-pixel 218 will turn from left to right. This is true for all sub-pixels on the right side of the line of symmetry 220, each of which has a filter core, which is a mirror image of the filter core of the opposite sub-pixel. In addition, the sub-pixel 222 has a filter core, which is a mirror image, which is turned from the filter core of the sub-pixel 218 from up to down. This is also true for all other filter cores below the line of symmetry 224, each of which is a mirror image of a relative sub-pixel filter. Finally, the filter core of the sub-pixel 226 is a mirror image of the filter of the sub-pixel 228, which is flipped on a diagonal. This is true for all sub-pixels above and to the right of the symmetry line 230, and its filter is a diagonal mirror image of the filter relative to the diagonal of the sub-pixel filter. Finally, the core of the filter on this diagonal is internal diagonal symmetry, which has the same coefficient value on the opposite side of the diagonal of the symmetry line 230. The core of a complete filter

組合的範例在此處進一步來說明在該濾波器核心中的所 有這些對稱性。僅有需要計算的濾波器為有陰影者,次像 素218、228、232、234、236及238。在此例中,具有一重覆單 元尺寸為5,所需要的濾波器之最小數目僅為6。該剩餘的 濾波器可由翻轉在不同軸上該6個計算的濾波器來決定。 每當一重覆單元的尺寸為奇數時,決定該濾波器之最小數 目的公式為: ρ + ι (χ [ Ρ + ΓThe combined example further illustrates all these symmetries in the filter core. The only filters that need to be calculated are the shaded ones, the sub-pixels 218, 228, 232, 234, 236 and 238. In this example, with a repeating unit size of 5, the minimum number of filters required is only 6. The remaining filters can be determined by flipping the six calculated filters on different axes. Whenever the size of an overlapping unit is odd, the minimum number of the filter is determined. The formula is: ρ + ι (χ [Ρ + Γ

Nfilts = 2 ^~^ · 其中P為該重覆單元的奇數寬度及高度,而Nfilts為所需 要的濾波器之最小數目。 圖3 4所示為該重覆單元尺寸為偶數情況下的範例。僅有 需要計算的濾波器為有陰影者,次像素240、242及244。在 此例中,具有一重覆單元尺寸為4,僅必須要計算三個濾 波器。每當一重覆單元的尺寸為偶數時,決定該濾波器之 最小數目的通用公式為:Nfilts = 2 ^ ~ ^ · where P is the odd width and height of the repeating unit, and Nfilts is the minimum number of filters required. Figures 3 to 4 show an example where the size of the repeating unit is even. The only filters to be calculated are those with shadows, sub-pixels 240, 242, and 244. In this example, with a repeating unit size of 4, only three filters have to be calculated. Whenever the size of an overlapping unit is even, the general formula for determining the minimum number of filters is:

其中P為該重覆單元的偶數寬度及高度,而Neven為所需 要的濾波器之最小數目。 回到圖3 2,該中央次像素204之呈現邊界208包覆一區域 210,其覆蓋了四個原始像素樣本區域212。每個這些重疊 區域為相等,且其係數必須加到1,所以其每個為1/4或 0.25。這些為圖33中次像素238之係數,而此例中的2x2濾波 器核心將為: -35- L --------------^一 一~> 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 圖33中次像素218之係數係在圖35中展開。此次像素218 係由一呈現區域246所限定,其重疊了 5個該周圍输入像素 樣本區域248。雖然此次像素在一重覆單元之左上角,其 假設為了計算起見,永遠有另一個重覆單元區域通過具有 額外的樣本區域248來重疊之邊緣。這些計算係對於一般 性的例子完成,而該顯示器的邊緣將以不同於上述的方法 來處理。因為呈現區域246水平地橫跨三個樣本區域248, 及垂直的三個,其必須對所有的係數保持一 3x3濾波器核 心。該係數係如前所述地計算:由該呈現區域246所覆蓋 的每個輸入樣本區域的面積經過量測,然後除以該呈現區 域246的總面積。呈現區域246完全不會重疊該左上、右上、 左下或右下樣本區域248,所以其係數為零。呈現區域246 重叠於該中間上方及中間左方樣本區域248之該呈現區域 246的總面積之1/8,所以其係數為1/8。呈現區域246以最大 的比例重叠該中央樣本區域248,其為11/16。最後,呈現 區域246重叠該中間右方及底部中間樣本區域248,最小量 為1/32。將這些依順序放置造成以下的係數濾波器核心: 0 1/8 0 1/8 11/16 1/32 -36-Where P is the even width and height of the repeating unit, and Neven is the minimum number of filters required. Returning to FIG. 32, the rendering boundary 208 of the central sub-pixel 204 covers a region 210 that covers four original pixel sample regions 212. Each of these overlapping areas is equal, and its coefficient must be increased to 1, so each of them is 1/4 or 0.25. These are the coefficients of the sub-pixel 238 in FIG. 33, and the core of the 2x2 filter in this example will be: -35- L -------------- ^ 一一 ~ & 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 The coefficients of the sub-pixel 218 in FIG. 33 are expanded in FIG. 35. This time the pixel 218 is defined by a presentation area 246, which overlaps five surrounding input pixel sample areas 248. Although this time the pixel is in the upper left corner of a repeating unit, it is assumed that for calculation purposes, there is always another overlapping unit area that has an overlapping edge by having an additional sample area 248. These calculations are done for a general example, and the edges of the display will be treated differently than described above. Because the presentation area 246 spans three sample areas 248 horizontally and three vertically, it must maintain a 3x3 filter core for all coefficients. The coefficient is calculated as described above: the area of each input sample area covered by the presentation area 246 is measured and then divided by the total area of the presentation area 246. The presentation area 246 does not overlap the upper left, upper right, lower left, or lower right sample area 248 at all, so its coefficient is zero. The presentation area 246 overlaps the upper and middle left sample area 248 of the total area of the presentation area 246 by 1/8, so its coefficient is 1/8. The presentation area 246 overlaps the central sample area 248 at the largest ratio, which is 11/16. Finally, the presentation area 246 overlaps the middle right and bottom middle sample area 248 with a minimum of 1/32. Placing these in order results in the following coefficient filter cores: 0 1/8 0 1/8 11/16 1/32 -36-

Pi! 3¾. 12^ 0 1/32 0Pi! 3¾. 12 ^ 0 1/32 0

來自圖33之次像素232示於圖36,其呈現區域250重疊5 個樣本區域252。如前所述,重疊每個樣本區域252之樣本 區域250之面積的部份即計算,並除以該呈現區域250之面 積。在此例中,對於所有的係數僅需要保持一 3x2的濾波 器核心,但為了一致性,將使用一3x3。圖36之濾波器核 心將為 1/64 17/64 0 7/64 37/64 2/64 0 0 0 來自圖3 3之次像素234示於圖3 7,其呈現區域254重疊樣 本區域256。此係數計算將造成以下的核心: 4/64 14/64 0 14/64 32/64 0 0 0 0The sub-pixel 232 from FIG. 33 is shown in FIG. 36, and its presentation area 250 overlaps five sample areas 252. As described above, the area of the sample area 250 that overlaps each sample area 252 is calculated and divided by the area of the presentation area 250. In this example, only a 3x2 filter core needs to be maintained for all coefficients, but for consistency, a 3x3 will be used. The filter core of FIG. 36 will be 1/64 17/64 0 7/64 37/64 2/64 0 0 0. The sub-pixel 234 from FIG. 33 is shown in FIG. 37, and its presentation area 254 overlaps the sample area 256. This coefficient calculation will result in the following cores: 4/64 14/64 0 14/64 32/64 0 0 0 0

來自圖33之次像素228示於圖38,其呈現區域258重疊樣 本區域260。此係數計算將造成以下的核心: 4/64 27/64 1/64 4/64 27/64 1/64 -37- |2380_ 0 0 0 最後,來自圖33之次像素236示於圖39,其呈現區域2 62 重叠樣本區域264。此例的係數計算將造成以下的核心: 9/64 23/64 0 9/64 23/64 0 0 0 0Sub-pixel 228 from FIG. 33 is shown in FIG. 38, and its presentation area 258 overlaps the sample area 260. This coefficient calculation will result in the following core: 4/64 27/64 1/64 4/64 27/64 1/64 -37- | 2380_ 0 0 0 Finally, the sub-pixel 236 from FIG. 33 is shown in FIG. 39, which The presentation area 2 62 overlaps the sample area 264. The coefficient calculation for this example will result in the following core: 9/64 23/64 0 9/64 23/64 0 0 0 0

此可推斷出具有一像素對次像素比例為4 : 5之範例所需 要的所有最少數目的計算。所有其它的25係數組合可由在 不同軸上翻轉以上6個濾波器核心來建構,如圖33所示。This infers all the minimum number of calculations required for an example with a one-to-subpixel ratio of 4: 5. All other 25 coefficient combinations can be constructed by flipping the above 6 filter cores on different axes, as shown in Figure 33.

為了調整的目的,該濾波器核心永遠必須加總到1,或 其將影響該輸出影像的亮度。此對於上述的所有6個濾波 器核心為真。但是,如果該核心實際用於此形式,該係數 值皆為分數,並需要浮點算術。其在產業中常見地是將所 有的係數乘以某個數值來將其皆轉換到整數。然後整數算 術可用來乘以输入樣本值該濾波器核心係數,只要稍後將 總數除以相同的數值。檢查以上的濾波器核心,其發現到 64將為一良好的數目來乘以所有的係數。此將造成以下來 自圖3 5之次像素2 1 8之濾波器核心: 0 8 0 8 44 2 0 2 0 -38-For adjustment purposes, the filter core must always add up to 1, or it will affect the brightness of the output image. This is true for all 6 filter cores described above. However, if the core is actually used in this form, the coefficient values are all fractions and require floating-point arithmetic. It is common in the industry to multiply all coefficients by a value to convert them all to integers. Integer arithmetic can then be used to multiply the input core value of the filter core coefficients by simply dividing the total by the same value later. Checking the filter core above, it was found that 64 would be a good number multiplied by all the coefficients. This will result in the following filter cores from the sub-pixel 2 1 8 of Figure 35: 0 8 0 8 44 2 0 2 0 -38-

(除以6 4) 在此例中,所有其它的濾波器核心皆類似地修正來將其 轉換成整數,以便於計算。當除數為2的次方時,特別方 便,在此例中即為如此。除以2的次方可藉由向右偏移該 結果來快速地在軟體或硬體中完成。在此例中,向右偏移 6個位元將為除以64。 相反地,一稱之為XGA(其用來代表擴充的繪圖介面卡, 但現在僅代表1024x768)的商用標準顯示器彩色影像格 式,其具有1〇24行及768列。此格式可調整來顯示在圖10 之配置38上,其具有1600x1200的紅色及綠色放射器34及 36(加上800x600藍色放射器32)。此組態之調整或重新取樣 比例為16到25,其造成625個唯一的係數組合。使用係數 之對稱性可降低該數目到一更為合理的91組。但是,甚至 此較少數目的濾波器由手算來進行亦很煩雜,如上所述。 而是,一電腦程式(一機器可讀取媒體)可使使用一機器 (如一電腦)來自動化此工作,並快速地產生該組係數。實 際上,此程式僅使用一次來產生對於任何給定的比例之濾 波器核心的一表格。然後,該表格由調整/呈現軟體使用, 或燒製成硬體的ROM(唯讀記憶體),其實施調整及次像素 呈現。 該第一步驟中,該濾波器產生程式必須完成,其計算出 該調整比例及該重覆單元的尺寸。此係由將該输入像素的 數目及該输出次像素的數目除以其GCEK最大公因數)來完 成。此亦可在一小的雙重層叠的迴圈中完成。該外部迴圏 -39- -------------------------ί ΙΙ23#04 k 對於一系列的質數來測試該兩個數目。此迴圈將輪迴,直 到其已經測試質數,最高到該兩個像素數量中較小者的平 分根。實際上的典型螢幕尺寸,其將永遠不需要測試大於 4 1之質數。相反地,因為此演算法係要事先產生濾波器核 心”離線”,該外部迴路可僅執行由2到一些不合理的大的 數目之所有數目,質數及一非質數。此可浪費CPU時間, 因為其將進行比需要的更多之測試,但該碼僅對於一特定 的输入及输出螢幕尺寸的組合來進行一次。 一內部迴路對目前的質數進行測試該兩個像素計數。如 果兩個計數平均地除以該質數,則其皆可除以該質數,而 該內部迴圈即繼續,直到其不可能將該兩個計數之一再除 以該質數。當該外部迴圈終止時,該剩餘的小數目將可有 效地除以該GCD。該兩個數目將為該兩個像素計數之”調 整比例”。 一些典型的數值: 320:640 成為 1:2 384:480 成為 4:5 512:640 成為 4:5 480:768 成為 5:8 640:1024 成為 5:8 這些比例將代表該像素對次像素或P:S比,其中P為該输 入像素分子,而S為該比例的次像素分母。橫跨或向下一 重覆單元所需要的濾波器核心之數目在這些比例中為 S。所需要的核心之總數為該水平及垂直S數值之乘積。 -40- 1年沾1曰1 在大部份所有常用的VGA取得的螢幕尺寸,該水平及垂直 重覆圖樣尺問將成為相同,而所需要的濾波器數目將為 S2。由上表可知,一640x480影像調整成一 1024x768 PenTile矩 陣,其具有一 P:S比為5:8,且將需要8x8或64個不同的濾 波器核心(在考慮到對稱性之前)。 在一理論性的環境中,加到1之分數值即用於一減波器 核心中。實際上,如上所述,濾波器核心通常計算成整數 值,其具有一除數,其事後施加來正規化該總數回到1。 其很重要地是由計算該加權值開始以儘可能地準確,所以 該呈現區域可在一足夠大的座標系統中計算,以保證所有 的計算為整數。經驗顯示,要用於影像調整狀況中的正確 座標系統為其输入像素的尺寸等於橫跨一重覆單元之輸 出次像素之數目,其使得一输出像素的尺寸等於橫跨一重 覆單元之輸入像素的數目。此本質上為計數器,並似乎為 向後。舉例而言,在一調整512輸入像素到640之例子中, 其具有一 4:5 P:S比,即可在一繪圖紙上繪出該輸入像素 為5x5正方形,而在其上方的輸出像素成為4x4正方形。此 為兩個像素可繪出的最小比例,其可保持所有的數目為整 數。在此座標系統中,位在該輸出次像素中心處的該菱形 呈現區域的面積永遠等於一輸出像素的面積之2倍,或 2*P2。此為可做為該濾波器加權值之分母的最小整數。 不幸地是,因為該菱形橫跨了數個输入像素,其可切分 成三角形。一三角形的面積為其寬度乘以高度除以2,且 此可再次造成非整數值。計算該面積的兩倍可解決此問 -41 - |12380|貢 題,所以該程式可計算面積乘以2。此使得可用於整數濾 波器之最小分母等於4*Ρ2。 接著,其必須決定每個濾波器核心必須為多大。在以上 由手完成的範例中,一些該濾波器核心為2x2,一些則為 3x2,其它則為3x3。該輸入及输出像素的相對尺寸,以及 該菱形呈現區域如何彼此跨過,即決定了所需要的該最大 濾波器核心尺寸。當來自具有超過兩個输出次像素之來源 的調整影像橫跨每個輸入像素(例如100:201或1 :3) , — 2x2 濾波器核心成為可能。此將需要較少的硬體即可實施。再 者,該影像品質係優於先前技藝之調整,因為該得到的影 像補捉到該指示的目標像素之”正方性”,儘可能地維持最 佳的空間頻率,其由許多平板顯示器之尖銳邊緣所代表。 這些空間頻率係由字型使用,而圖像設計者可改進該外觀 解析度,而欺騙在本技藝中所熟知的Nyquist限制。先前技 藝的調整演算法可使用內插來限制該調整的空間頻率到 該Nyquist限制,或保持其尖銳性,但產生了物件化的相位 誤差。 當向下調整時,比輸出次像素要有更多的輸入像素。在 任何大於1 :1之調整因數(例如101:100或2: 1),該濾波器尺 寸成為4x4或更大。其將很難說服硬體製造商來加入更多 的線緩衝器來寅施此架構。但是,停留在1:1及1:2之範圍 內,其好處為該核心尺寸維持在一固定的3x3濾波器。幸 運地是,大部份必須要實施在硬體中的例子會落在此範圍 內,其可合理地撰寫程式來簡單地產生3x3核心。在一些 -42- 更 93 12 年M f 日 特別的例子中,類似上述以手完成的範例,一些濾波器核 心將小於3x3。在其它的特殊範例中,即使其理論上該濾 波器有可能成為3x3,其結果為每個濾波器僅為2x2。但 是,其較容易來對於一般性的例子計算該核心,並較容易 來實施具有一固定的核心尺寸之硬髁。 最後,現在計算該核心濾波器加權值時僅為計算該3x3 输入像素之面積(乘以2)的工作,其相交於該重覆單元中 每個 <非對稱性)位置處的該输出菱形。此在本產業中所熟 知的非常直接的”呈現”工作。對於每個濾波器核心,可計 算3x3或9個係數。為了計算每個係數,即產生該菱形的呈 現區域之向量描述。此形狀在該输入像素區域邊緣處裁 切。其使用在本產業中所熟知的多邊形裁切演算法。最 後,即計算該裁切的多邊形之面積(乘以2)。所得到的面 積為該濾波器核心之相對應單元的係數。來自此程式的一 樣本輸出顯示如下: 來源像素解析度1024 目標次像素解析度1280 調整比例為4 : 5 濾波器數目皆除以256 所需要的最小濾波器(具有對稱性> :6 此處產生的濾波器數目(無對稱性):25 -43- 格 123¾ 魄 f 032 0 4 28 0 16 16 0 28 4 0 0 32 0 32 176 8 68 148 0 108 108 0 148 68 0 8 176 32 0 8 0 0 8 0 4 4 0 8 0 0 0 8 0 4 68 0 16 56 0 36 36 0 56 16 0 0 68 4 28 148 8 56 128 0 92 92 0 128 56 0 8 148 28 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 108 4 36 92 0 64 64 0 92 36 0 4 108 16 16 108 4 36 92 0 64 64 0 92 36 0 4 108 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0_ _0_ ^_ 28 148 8 56 128 0 92 92 0 128 56 0 8 148 28 4 68 0 16 56 0 36 36 0 56 16 0 0 68 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 8 0 4 4 0 8 0 0 0 8 0 32 176 8 68 148 0 108 108 0 148 68 0 8 176 32 0 32 0 4 28 0 16 16 0 28 4 0 0 32 0(Divide by 6 4) In this example, all other filter cores are similarly modified to convert them to integers for ease of calculation. This is particularly convenient when the divisor is a power of two, which is the case in this example. Dividing by a power of two can be done quickly in software or hardware by shifting the result to the right. In this example, an offset of 6 bits to the right will be divided by 64. In contrast, a commercial standard display color image format called XGA (which is used to represent an extended graphics interface card, but now only 1024x768) has 1024 rows and 768 columns. This format can be adjusted to be displayed on configuration 38 of FIG. 10, which has 1600x1200 red and green emitters 34 and 36 (plus 800x600 blue emitter 32). This configuration has an adjustment or resampling ratio of 16 to 25, which results in 625 unique coefficient combinations. Using the symmetry of the coefficients reduces this number to a more reasonable 91 group. However, even this small number of filters can be cumbersome to perform by hand, as described above. Instead, a computer program (a machine-readable medium) can use a machine (such as a computer) to automate this task and quickly generate the set of coefficients. In fact, this program uses it only once to generate a table of filter cores for any given ratio. The table is then used by the adjustment / rendering software, or burned into hard ROM (read-only memory), which performs the adjustment and sub-pixel rendering. In the first step, the filter generation program must be completed, which calculates the adjustment ratio and the size of the repeating unit. This is done by dividing the number of input pixels and the number of output sub-pixels by its GCEK greatest common factor). This can also be done in a small double-layered loop. The external loopback -39- ------------------------- ί ΙΙ23 # 04 k Test the two numbers against a series of prime numbers. This loop will revolve until it has tested prime numbers, up to the bisector of the smaller of the two pixels. The actual typical screen size will never need to test prime numbers greater than 41. In contrast, because this algorithm is to generate the filter core "offline" in advance, the external loop can only execute all numbers from 2 to some unreasonably large numbers, prime numbers, and a non-prime number. This can waste CPU time because it will perform more tests than needed, but the code is only performed once for a specific combination of input and output screen sizes. An internal loop tests the current prime number for the two pixel counts. If both counts are divided by the prime number equally, then both can be divided by the prime number, and the internal loop continues until it is impossible to divide one of the two counts by the prime number again. When the external loop is terminated, the remaining small number will be effectively divided by the GCD. The two numbers will be the "adjusted scale" of the two pixel counts. Some typical values: 320: 640 becomes 1: 2 384: 480 becomes 4: 5 512: 640 becomes 4: 5 480: 768 becomes 5: 8 640: 1024 becomes 5: 8 These ratios will represent the pixel to sub-pixel or P: S ratio, where P is the input pixel numerator and S is the sub-pixel denominator of the ratio. The number of filter cores required to span or repeat the next unit is S in these ratios. The total number of cores required is the product of the horizontal and vertical S values. -40- 1 year 1 year 1 In most of the commonly used VGA screen sizes, the horizontal and vertical repeating patterns will be the same, and the number of filters required will be S2. As can be seen from the table above, a 640x480 image is adjusted to a 1024x768 PenTile matrix, which has a P: S ratio of 5: 8, and will require 8x8 or 64 different filter cores (before considering symmetry). In a theoretical environment, a value added to 1 is used in a wave reducer core. In fact, as mentioned above, the filter core is usually calculated as an integer value with a divisor that is applied afterwards to normalize the total back to one. It is important to start by calculating the weighted value to be as accurate as possible, so the presentation area can be calculated in a sufficiently large coordinate system to ensure that all calculations are integers. Experience shows that the correct coordinate system to be used in the image adjustment situation is that the size of its input pixels is equal to the number of output sub-pixels across a repeating unit, which makes the size of an output pixel equal to number. This is essentially a counter and seems to be backward. For example, in an example of adjusting 512 input pixels to 640, which has a 4: 5 P: S ratio, the input pixel can be drawn as a 5x5 square on a drawing paper, and the output pixel above it becomes 4x4 square. This is the smallest ratio that two pixels can draw, and it keeps all numbers as integers. In this coordinate system, the area of the diamond-shaped presentation area at the center of the output sub-pixel is always equal to 2 times the area of an output pixel, or 2 * P2. This is the smallest integer that can be used as the denominator of the weighted value of the filter. Unfortunately, because the rhombus spans several input pixels, it can be split into triangles. The area of a triangle is its width multiplied by its height divided by two, and this again results in non-integer values. Calculating twice the area can solve the problem -41-| 12380 |, so the program can calculate the area multiplied by 2. This makes the smallest denominator available for integer filters equal to 4 * P2. It must then decide how large each filter core must be. In the hand-made example above, some of the filter cores are 2x2, some are 3x2, and others are 3x3. The relative sizes of the input and output pixels, and how the diamond-shaped presentation areas cross each other, determine the required maximum filter core size. When adjusting an image from a source with more than two output sub-pixels across each input pixel (eg 100: 201 or 1: 3), a 2x2 filter core becomes possible. This will require less hardware to implement. Moreover, the image quality is better than the adjustment of the previous technique, because the obtained image captures the "squareness" of the indicated target pixel, and maintains the best spatial frequency as much as possible. Represented by the edge. These spatial frequencies are used by the font, and the graphic designer can improve the appearance resolution and deceive the Nyquist limitation known in the art. Prior art adjustment algorithms can use interpolation to limit the adjusted spatial frequency to the Nyquist limit, or maintain its sharpness, but produce objectified phase errors. When adjusted down, there are more input pixels than output sub-pixels. At any adjustment factor greater than 1: 1 (for example, 101: 100 or 2: 1), the filter size becomes 4x4 or greater. It will be difficult to persuade hardware manufacturers to add more line buffers to implement this architecture. However, staying in the range of 1: 1 and 1: 2 has the advantage that the core size is maintained at a fixed 3x3 filter. Fortunately, most of the examples that must be implemented in hardware fall into this range, which can reasonably write programs to simply generate 3x3 cores. In some special cases of -42- and M12 in 2012, similar to the hand-made example above, some filter cores will be less than 3x3. In other special cases, even if it is theoretically possible that the filter becomes 3x3, the result is only 2x2 per filter. However, it is easier to calculate the core for a general example, and it is easier to implement a hard core with a fixed core size. Finally, the core filter weight is now calculated only for the area (multiplied by 2) of the 3x3 input pixels, which intersects the output diamond at each < asymmetry position in the repeating unit . This is a very straightforward "presentation" task known in the industry. For each filter core, 3x3 or 9 coefficients can be calculated. In order to calculate each coefficient, a vector description of the presenting area of the rhombus is generated. This shape is cropped at the edge of the input pixel area. It uses a polygon cropping algorithm that is well known in the industry. Finally, the area of the cropped polygon is calculated (multiplied by 2). The area obtained is the coefficient of the corresponding unit at the core of the filter. The sample output from this program is shown as follows: Source pixel resolution 1024 Target sub-pixel resolution 1280 Adjustment ratio 4: 5 The number of filters is divided by 256 The minimum filter required (with symmetry >: 6 here Number of filters generated (without symmetry): 25 -43- divisions 123 ¾ f 032 0 4 28 0 16 16 0 28 4 0 0 32 0 32 176 8 68 148 0 108 108 0 148 68 0 8 176 32 0 8 0 0 8 0 4 4 0 8 0 0 8 0 4 68 0 16 56 0 36 36 0 56 16 0 0 68 4 28 148 8 56 128 0 92 92 0 128 56 0 8 148 28 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 108 4 36 92 0 64 64 0 92 36 0 4 108 16 16 108 4 36 92 0 64 64 0 92 36 0 4 108 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0_ _0_ ^ _ 28 148 8 56 128 0 92 92 0 128 56 0 8 148 28 4 68 0 16 56 0 36 36 0 56 16 0 0 68 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 8 0 4 4 0 8 0 0 8 0 32 176 8 68 148 0 108 108 0 148 68 0 8 176 32 0 32 0 4 28 0 16 16 0 28 4 0 0 32 0

在以上的樣本输出中,計算此例所需要的所有25個減波 器核心,而不需要考慮對稱性。此允許檢查該係數,並視 覺地驗證在這些重覆單元中的濾波器核心中有水平、垂直 及對角線對稱性。如前所述,該影像的邊緣及角落可唯一 地處理,或可用其它的平均值,或最有效單一貢獻者,或 黑色的數值來填入該”遺失的”输入資料樣本來近似。每組 -44 - 係數係用於一濾波器核心,如本技藝中所熟知。保持追蹤 該位置及對稱性運算子為軟體或硬體設計者的工作,其可 使用模數數學技術,其亦為本技藝中所熟知。產生該係數 的工作為一簡單的事情來對於對應於输出樣本點35之每 個樣本來計算該输入樣本區域120到输出樣本區域52之比 例性重叠區域,其使用在本技藝中已知的方式。 圖23所示為一樣本點122之陣列108,及覆蓋在圖12之藍 色平面取樣區域44上的圖21之有效樣本區域120,其中圖 2 1的樣本點122與圖1 1之紅色及綠色”檢查板”陣列並不具 有相同的空間解析度格柵,也並未重合。產生該轉換等式 的計算方法如前所述地進行。首先,決定三色像素元件的 重覆陣列之尺寸,接著決定該獨特係數的最小數目,然後 決定對於每個相對應的输出樣本點46之输入樣本區域120 到輸出樣本區域44之比例性覆蓋之那些係數的值。每個這 些數值係應用到該轉換等式。該重覆的三色像素元件之陣 列及所得到的係數數目係於對於該紅色及綠色平面所決 定的為相同的數目。 圖24所示為一樣本點之陣列110,及覆蓋在圖8之藍色平 面取樣區域123上的圖21之有效樣本區域,其中圖21的樣 本點122與圖11之紅色(紅色重構點35)及綠色(綠色重構點 37)”檢查板,,陣列並不具有相同的空間解析度格柵,也並 未重合。產生該轉換等式的計算方法如前所述地進行。首 先,即決定該三色像素元件之重覆陣列的尺寸。接下來, 決定唯一係數的最小數目,然後決定每個相對應的输出樣 -45- Γ'年广月日 本點23之输入樣本區域120到輸出樣本區域123之比例性重 疊之那些係數的值。每個這些數值係應用到該轉換等式。 前者已經檢查了 CRT的RGB格式。一習用的RGB平板顯示 配置10具有配置在一三色像素元件8中的紅色4、綠色6及 藍色2放射器,如圖1之先前技藝。為了根據此配置來投影 一格式化的影像到該三色像素元件,如圖6或圖10中所 示,必須決定該重構點。該紅色、綠色及藍色重構點之放 置係示於圖2中的配置12中。該紅色、綠色及藍色重構點 並未彼此重合,其有一水平位移。根據Benzschawel等人在 美國專利編號5,341,153,以及稍後的Hill等人的美國專利編 號6,188,385中所揭示的先前技藝中,這些位置係做為具有 樣本區域的樣本點3、5及7,如圖3之先前技藝中所示的紅 色平面14,及圖4之先前技藝中所示的藍色平面16,及圖5 之先前技藝中所示的綠色平面1 8。 一轉換等式計算可由圖3、4及5中呈現的先前技藝配 置,在其中所揭示的方法來產生。在以上所揭示的方法 中,其可由計算該轉換等式的係數來利用,或濾波器核 心,對於所選擇的先前技藝配置之每個输出樣本點。圖25 所示為覆蓋在圖13之紅色平面取樣區域52上的圖3之紅色 平面的有效樣本區域125,其中在圖5中的紅色放射器35之 配置具有與圖6及圖10中配置相同的像素程度(重覆單兀) 解析度。產生該轉換等式計算之方法如上述地進行。首 先,即決定該三色像素元件之重覆陣列的尺寸。然後該唯 一係數的最小數目即由注意到該對稱性來決定(在此例中 -46- ^23|0417: - ;a . 9a 12. - 〇 ' - ; :: it” 為2>。然後,即可決定那些係數的數值,藉由對於每個相 對應的輸出樣本點35之输入樣本區域125到输出樣本區域 52之比例性重疊。每個這些數值係應用到該轉換等式。如 圖4所示,該重新取樣的綠色平面之計算係以類似的方式 進行,但該输出樣本陣列即旋轉180。,並偏移該綠色輸入 樣本區域127。圖26所示為覆蓋在圖8之藍色平面取樣區域 123上的圖4之先前技藝的藍色平面的有效樣本區域127。 圖40所示為對應於圖32中該紅色及綠色樣本之藍色的 範例。圖40中的樣本區域266為正方形,而非在紅色及綠 色範例中的菱形。該原始像素邊界272的數目即相同,但 有較少的藍色输出像素邊界274。該係數係如前述地來計 算;每個輸入樣本區域268由該呈現區域266所覆蓋的區域 即量測,然後除以該呈現區域266的總面積。在此例中, 該藍色取樣區域266相等地覆蓋四個原始像素區域268,產 生具有4個係數1/4之2x2的濾波器核心。該8個其它的藍色 輸出像素區域270及其與原始像素區域268之幾何相交可見 於圖40〇所得到的濾波器之對稱關係可在每個輸出像素區 域270中原始像素邊界274的對稱性配置中觀察到。 在更為複雜的例子中,使用一電腦程式來產生藍色濾波 器核心。此程式可發現到非常類似於產生紅色及綠色濾波 器核心之程式。在圖11中的藍色次像素樣本點33與該紅色 及綠色樣本點35、3 7為兩倍的距離,其建議是該藍色呈現 區域將為兩倍寬。但是,紅色及綠色的呈現區域為菱形, 因此為該樣本點之間的間隔之兩倍寬。此使得該紅色、綠 -47- I爾_ … 一 Η 年 月—日 色及藍色的呈現區域為相同的寬度及高度,其造成數個方 便的數目;該藍色濾波器核心的尺寸將相等於紅色及綠色 的尺寸。同時,該藍色的重覆單元尺寸通常將會等於紅色 及綠色之重覆單元尺寸。因為該藍色次像素樣本點33之間 隔為兩倍,該P:S丨像素對次像素)比例即加倍。舉例而言, 該紅色的2:3比成為藍色的4:3。但是,在此比例中的S數 目可決定該重覆單元尺寸,且其並未受到加倍而改變。但 是,如果該分母正巧要除以2,其可完成一額外的最佳化。 在該例中,藍色的兩個數目係除以一 2的額外次方。舉例 而言,如果該紅及綠的P:S比例為3:4,則該藍色比例將為 6:4,其可簡化成3:2。此代表在這些(偶數)例子中,該藍 色重覆單元尺寸可以切成一半,而所需要的濾波器核心之 總數將為該紅色及綠色之四分之一。相反地,為了簡化演 算法或硬體設計,其有可能使得該藍色重覆單元尺寸相等 於紅色及綠色。所得到的濾波器核心之組合將具有雙倍 (寅際上為四倍),但其工作係相等於該濾波器核心的紅色 及綠色組合。 因此,採用該紅色及綠色濾波器核心程式,並使其產生 藍色濾波器核心所需要的唯一修正為加倍該P : S比例之分 子,並改變該呈現區域成為一正方形,而非菱形。 現在考慮圖6之配置20,及圖9之藍色樣本區域124。此 係類似於藍色樣本區域124為正方形之先前範例。但是, 因為其每個相隔的行係在其一半高度處向上或向下交 錯,其計算很複雜。第一眼看起來,似乎該重覆單元尺寸 -48- ΓΙ2380ΙΓ ,獻1¾ 將水平地加倍。但是,已發現到以下的程序來產生正確的 濾波器核心: 1) 產生一濾波器核心的重覆單元組合,如同該藍色樣 本點並未交錯,如上所述。檩記該重覆單元的濾波器表格 之行及列,其數目自零開始,並結束在該重覆單元尺寸減 1 〇 2) 在該输出影像中的偶數行,在該重覆單元中的濾波 器我們即依此修正。在該输出γ座標的重覆單元尺寸中的 模數選擇要使用該濾波器核心組合中使用那一列,在X座 標的重覆單元尺寸中的模數選擇一行,並告知要使用該Y 選擇列中的那一個濾波器。 3) 在該奇數输出行上,在採取其模數之前,將該Y座 標減在該重覆單元尺寸中丨。該X座標係視為相同於該偶 數行。此將選出一濾波器核心,其對於圖9之交錯的例子 為正確。 在一些例子中,其有可能來事先執行該模數計算,並預 先交錯該濾波器核心的表格。不幸地是,此僅在一重覆單 元的例子中利用一偶數行來工作。如果該重覆單元具有一 奇數行,一半的時間中該模數算術選擇該偶數行,而另一 半時間為奇數行。因此,要交錯那一行的計算必須在使用 該表格的時間來進行,並非事先進行。 最後,考慮圖6之配置20,及圖8的籃色取樣區域123。 此係類似於先前的例子中,其對於六角形的樣本區域有額 外的複雜度。考慮這些六角形的第一步驟係如何正確地繪 -49- |Ι23#04Κ· 年..月 曰 出它們,或在一電腦程式中產生它們的向量表列。為了最 為準確,這些六角形必須為最小面積的六角形,但是其將 不是正常的六角形。一幾何證明可簡易地在圖41中完成, 圖8的這些六角形取樣區域123在每邊要比該正方形取樣 區域276寬1/8。同時,該六角形取樣區域123的上緣及底緣 在每一端係比該正方形取樣區域276的上緣及底緣要窄 1/8。最後,請注意該六角形取樣區域123與該正方形取樣 區域276具有相同的高度。 這些六角形取樣區域123之濾波器核心可用前述的相同 幾何方式來產生,其對於紅色及綠色為菱形,或對於藍色 為正方形。該呈現區域為簡單的六角形,並量測出這些六 角形覆蓋於周圍输入像素之重疊面積。不幸地是,當使用 該略寬的六角形取樣區域123時,該濾波器核心的尺寸有 時候會超過一 3x3濾波器,即使在維持於該調整比例在1:1 及1 : 2之間。分析顯示如果該調整比例在1 : 1及4 : 5之間, 該核心尺寸將為40。而調整比例在4:5及1:2之間者,該濾 波器核心尺寸將維持在3x3。(請注意,因為該六角形取樣 區域123與該正方形取樣區域276為相同的高度,而該濾波 器核心的垂直尺寸維持相同)。 對一較寬的濾波器核心來設計硬體並不像是建構硬體 來處理較高的濾波器核心那樣困難,所以對於硬體為主的 次像素呈現/調整系統並不合理來需要做成一 4x3的滅波 器。但是,亦有可能有其它的解決方案。當調整比例在1:1 及4:5之間時,使用了圖9的正方形取樣區域124,其造成 -50- 1238· f U· 12. — g 户 3x3濾波器。當該調整比例在4:5及1:2之間,使用圖8之更 為準確的六角形取樣區域123,且亦需要3x3濾波器。依此 方式,該硬體維持較簡單,且可較便宜地來建構。該硬體 僅需要來對於一種濾波器核心的尺寸來建構,且用來建構 那些濾波器之演算法為唯一改變的事情。 類似於圖9之正方形取樣區域,圖8的六角形取樣區域係 在每另一個行中來交錯。分析顯示,選擇上述圖9的濾波 器核心之相同的方法將可對於圖8之六角形取樣區域而工 作。基本上,此代表該濾波器核心的係數可以計算,如同 該六角形並未交錯,即使其通常為交錯。此可使得計算較 簡單,並避免該濾波器核心的表格成為兩倍大。 在圖3 2到3 9的菱形呈現區域的例子中,該面積係在設計 來使得所有面積為整數而易於計算之座標系統中來計 算。可通常可造成較大的總面積,及濾波器核心必須在使 用中除以大的數目。有時候此造成該濾波器核心並非2的 次方,其使得該硬體設計更為困難。在圖41的例子中,該 六角形呈現區域123之額外寬度使其需要來將該濾波器核 心的係數乘以甚至更大的數目來使其皆為整數。在所有這 些例子中,其較佳地是找出一種方法來限制該濾波器核心 係數的除數之大小。為了使得該硬髖更容易設計,其較佳 地是能夠挑選該除數為2的次方。舉例而言,如果所有的 濾波器核心係設計來除以256,此除法運算可由一 8位元向 右偏移運算來執行。選擇256亦可保證所有的濾波器核心 係數將為8位元數值,其將可符合標準的”位元組寬”的唯 -51 - η 讀記憶體(ROM)。因此,以下的程序係用來產生具有一所 要的除數之濾波器核心。因為該較佳的除數為256,其將 用於以下的程序。 1) 使用浮點算術來計算該濾波器係數的面積。因為此 運算係在事前離線完成,此並未增加使用所得到之表格的 硬體成本。 2) 將每個係數除以該呈現區域的已知總面積,然後乘 以256。此將使得該濾波器總數為256,如果所有的算術係 在浮點中完成,但更多的步驟必須來建構整數表。 3) 進行一二進制搜尋來找出一進位點(在0·0及1.0之 間),其在當轉換成整數時使得濾波器總數為256。一二進 制搜尋為本產業中熟知的常用演算法。如果此搜尋成功, 即已完成。一二進制搜尋會無法收斂,且此可由測試該迴 圏執行超過一次數來偵測。 4) 如果該二進制搜尋失敗,找出在該濾波器核心中一 合理地較大係數,並加入或減去一小數目來強迫該濾波器 之總和到256。 5) 對於特殊例子來檢查該濾波器一單一數值256〇此數 值將不會符合於一 8位元的位元組之表格,其中該最大可 能數目為255。在此特例中,設定該單一數值為255(256-1), 並加1到該周圍係數之一來保證該濾波器仍然加總到256。 圖31所示為在該特例中,圖11的輸出樣本配置40覆蓋在 圖15之輸入樣本配置70之上方,當該調整比例為每兩個輸 出次像素上的一個輸入像素。在此組態200中,當該原始 -52- 11¾¾1 資料已經不是所呈現的次像素,在該三色像素元件39中的 紅色放射器35之配對將視為如同組合的,其在該三色像素 元件3 9之中心具有一代表的重構點3 3。類似地,在該三色 像素元件39中的兩個綠色放射器37係視為在該三色像素 元件39之中心的一單一重構點33。該藍色放射器33已經在 中心處。因此,該5個放射器可視為如同其重新建構該RGB 資料格式樣本點,如果所有三色平面在該中心。此可視為 此次像素配置之”本質模式π。 ^ 藉由重新取樣,透過次像素呈現,一已經次像素呈現的 影像到另一個具有不同次像素配置之次像素的顯示器,其 可保持許多該改進的原始影像品質。根據一具體實施例, 其有需要來由此次像素呈現的影像產生一轉換到在此處 所揭示的配置。請參考圖1、2、3、4、5、25及26,已經 在以上揭示的方法將可使用,藉由計算每個輸出樣本點35 之轉換濾波器之係數,如圖25所示,其為相對於圖3之右 方位移的紅色輸入樣本5之目標顯示配置。該藍色放射器 係如上述來處理,其藉由計算該目標顯示配置相對於圖4 ^ 之位移的藍色輸入樣本7之每個輸出樣本點的轉換濾波器 之係數。 在該綠色平面的例子中,如圖5所示,其中該输入資料 已經為次像素呈現,因為該綠色資料仍在中央,對於該非 次像素呈現的例子不需要改變。 當使用次像素呈現的文字之應用包含在沿著非次像素 呈現的圖形及相片之側邊,其較佳地是偵測該次像素呈 -53- 月 ί-j j 現,並在上述的交替空間取樣濾波器上切換,但對於該調 整比例,即切換回到非次像素呈現的區域之正常的空間取 樣濾波器,其亦在上述說明。為了建構這種偵測器,必須 先瞭解次像素呈現的文字看起來像什麼,其可偵測的特徵 為何,且設定什麼遠離該非次像素呈現的影像。首先,在 該黑色及白色次像素呈現的字型邊緣處的像素將不會為 局部的中性彩色:也就是R#G。但是,在數個像素之上, 該彩色將為中性。也就是R^G。對於非次像素呈現的影像 或文字,這兩個條件皆不會發生。因此,我們具有自己的 偵測器,對於數個像素來測試局部的R#G及R^G。 因為在一 RGB長條面板上的次像素呈現為一維,沿著該 水平軸,一列接著一列,該測試為一維。以下所示為這樣 的一種測試: 如果 如果 Rx_2 + Rx_i+Rx+Rx+1+Rx+2三Gn + GxU+Gx+Gx+i + Gx·^ 或 如果 Rx-i+Rx+Rx+1+Rx+2三Gx_2+Gx_i+Gx+Gx+i 則應用次像素呈現輸入的另一個空間濾波器 否則應用正常的空間濾波器 在該文字為彩色的例子中,在該形式RxaGx的紅色及綠 色成分之間將有一關係,其中“a”為一常數。對於黑色及 白色文字,“a”之數值為1。該測試可擴充來偵測彩色的, 以及黑色及白色文字: 修 I238Q1 h e 93. 12. 如果 Rxd+Rxd+Rx+Rx+i+Rxu三aiGxj+Gxd+Gx+Gxw+Gxw) 或 則應用次像素呈現的输入之另一個空間濾波器 否則應用正常的空間濾波器 1及GXR表在該,,x」像素行座標處的該紅色及綠色成分 的數值。 可有一臨界測試來決定如果R^G足夠接近。其數值可調 整來得到最佳的結果。該項次的長度,該測試的間距可調 整來得到最佳結果,但一般將遵循以上的形式。 圖27所示為根據另一個具體實施例之顯示裝置,在三個 平面上一陣列中三色像素元件的配置。圖28所示為圖27 之裝置的陣列中該藍色放射器像素元件的配置。圖29所示 為圖27之裝置的陣列中該綠色放射器像素元件的配置。圖 30所示為圖27之裝置的一陣列中該紅色放射器像素元件 的配置。此配置及佈局可用於使用三個面板之投影機為主 的顯示器,每一個對於紅色、綠色及藍色,其結合每個影 像來投影在一螢幕上。該放射器配置及形狀可完全匹配於 圖8、13及14,其為圖6所示的該配置之樣本區域。因此, 在此處所揭示對於圖6之配置的圖形產生、轉換等式計算 及資料格式,其亦將可對圖27之三面板配置來工作。 對於高於大約2:3以及更高的調整比例,該次像素之 PenTileTM矩陣配置之次像素呈現的重新取樣的資料組合在 代表所得到的影像時更有效率。如果要儲存及/或傳送的 -55- 嗲ί2淨·黃… ~ 诗.日丨 • ” ―*·.***·*··1 **._·.**-** •參 影像預計要顯示到一 PenTileTM顯示器上,而該調整比例為 2:3或更高,其較佳地是在儲存及/或傳送之前執行重新取 樣,以儲存在記憶體儲存空間及/或頻寬。這種已經重新 取樣的影像稱之為”預呈現”。所以此預呈現可做為一有效 地少損失壓縮演算法。 本發明的好處係能夠採用任何大多數儲存的影像,並將 其預呈現到任何可實現的彩色次像素配置。 本發明的其它好處藉由範例來揭示在圖46、49及51之方 法中,其可提供利用上述的次像素呈現技術之伽瑪補償或 調整。提供具有次像素呈現之伽瑪調整之這三種方法可達 到在一顯示器上正確的影像彩色平衡。圖49及51之方法可 進一步藉由改進該輸出對比比例來改進該输出亮度或照 度。明確地說,圖46所示為在次像素呈現之前應用一預調 整伽瑪之方法;圖49所示為一伽瑪調整的次像素呈現之方 法;及圖5 1所示為具有一歐米茄函數的伽瑪調整的次像素 呈現之方法。這些方法的好處將說明如下。 圖46、49及51之方法可寅施在硬體、韌體或軟體,如在 圖52A到圖72中的詳細說明。舉例而言,包含在附錄中的 範例程式碼可用來寅施在此處所揭示的方法。因為人眼不 能夠區別絕對亮度或照度值,其需要改進照度對比比例, 特別是在高空間頻率。藉由改進該對比比例,可得到較高 的品質影像,並可避免彩色誤差,如以下的詳細解釋。 可改進對比比例之方法係由伽瑪調整的次像素呈現及 具有一歐米茄函數的伽瑪調整的次像素呈現的效應,其係 -56- 1238011 ‘ 「:: 夕 ν'' 丨 在該Nyquist限制處的調變轉換函數(MTF)之最大(MAX)/最小 (MIN)點,如在圖43、44、47及50中的詳細解釋。明確地 說,此處所述的該伽瑪調整次像素呈現技術可向下偏移該 MTF的MAX/MIN點之趨勢,以提供輸出影像的高對比,特 別是在高空間頻率,而維持正確的彩色平衡。 該次像素在一顯示器上的配置,例如圖6、10及42B中所 示,其在一水平軸、或垂直軸或在兩軸上具有交替的紅色 (R)或綠色(G)次像素。此處所述的伽瑪調整亦可應用到其 它顯示器形式,其使用一次像素呈現函數。也就是說,此 處所述的技術可應用在使用圖1所示之RGB長條格式之顯 示器。 圖43所示為一输入影像的正弦波,其具有相同的振幅, 並增加了空間頻率。圖44所示為該輸出的一範例性圖形, 當圖43之輸入影像接受次像素呈現,而沒有伽瑪調整時。 該输出的圖形(”輸出能量”)顯示出該输出能量的振幅隨 著空間頻率之增加而減小。 如圖44所示,該MTF值的50%代表在該Nyquist限制處的输 出振幅為該原始輸入影像或信號之振幅的一半。該MTF值 可由將該輸出的能量振幅除以該輸入的能量振幅來計 算:(MAXQut-MINQUt)/(MAXin-MINin)。該 Nyquist限制為在頻率(f) 處取樣的輸入信號之點,其至少為重新建構(f/2)之頻率的 兩倍大。換言之,該Nyquist限制為該空間頻率的最高點, 其中可重新建構一輸入信號。該Sparrow限制為MTF=0處的 空間頻率。因此,在該Nyquist限制處的量測,例如對比比 -57- i 又 : i ! 年犯月 &l| 例,其可用來決定影像品質。 圖44中在該Nyquist限制處的該輸出能量的對比比例,其 可由將該輸出MAX明亮能量位準除以該輸出MIN黑色能量 位準來計算。如圖4 4所示,該MAX明亮能量位準為最大輸 出能量位準的75%,而該MIN黑色能量位準為該最大輸出 能量位準的2 5 %。藉此,該對比比例可由除以這些]VIAX/MIN 數值決定,而提供一對比比例75%/25% = 3。因此,在對比 比例=3及高空間頻率下,在一顯示器上的圖44之圖形之 相對應的輸出將描述交替的黑暗及明亮棒,使得該棒的邊 緣將具有較低的尖銳度及對比。也就是說,來自該輸入影 像的一黑色棒將顯示成一暗灰色棒,而來自該输入的一白 色棒將以高空間頻率顯示成一淡灰色棒。 藉由使用圖49及51之方法,該對比比例可由向下偏移該 MTF的MAX及MIN點來改進。簡言之,在圖49之伽瑪調整的 次像素呈現方法之Nyquist限制處的MTF係示於圖4 7。如圖 47所示,該MTF可沿著一平坦趨勢線向下偏移,使得相較 於圖44之MTF,該MAX數值為65%,而該MIN數值為12.5%。 在圖47之Nyquist限制的對比比例因此為63%/12.5%=5(大 約)。藉此,該對比比例可由3改進到5。 在該Nyquist限制處的對比比例可使用圖5 1之具有一歐米 茄函數之伽瑪調整的方法來進一步改進。圖50所示為該 MTF可沿著一下降趨勢線進一步向下偏移,使得相較於圖 4 7之MTF,該MAX值為54.7%,而該MIN值為4.7%°在該Nyquist 限制處的對比比例為54.7%/4.7%=11.6(大約)。因此,該對比 -58 - 觀觀τ:πIn the sample output above, all 25 reducer cores required for this example are calculated without regard to symmetry. This allows checking the coefficient and visually verifying horizontal, vertical, and diagonal symmetry in the filter cores in these repeating units. As mentioned before, the edges and corners of the image can be uniquely processed, or can be approximated by filling in the "missing" input data sample with other averages, or the most effective single contributor, or black values. Each set of -44-coefficients is used in a filter core, as is well known in the art. Keep track This position and symmetry operator is the job of a software or hardware designer, and it can use modular mathematical techniques, which are also well known in the art. The work of generating this coefficient is a simple matter to calculate a proportional overlap region of the input sample region 120 to the output sample region 52 for each sample corresponding to the output sample point 35, using a manner known in the art . FIG. 23 shows the array 108 of the same point 122 and the effective sample area 120 of FIG. 21 covered on the blue plane sampling area 44 of FIG. 12, where the sample point 122 of FIG. 21 and the red and The green "inspection board" arrays do not have the same spatial resolution grid, nor do they overlap. The calculation method for generating this conversion equation is performed as described above. First, determine the size of the repeated array of three-color pixel elements, then determine the minimum number of unique coefficients, and then determine the proportional coverage of the input sample area 120 to the output sample area 44 for each corresponding output sample point 46. The values of those coefficients. Each of these values is applied to the transformation equation. The array of the repeated three-color pixel elements and the number of obtained coefficients are the same numbers determined for the red and green planes. FIG. 24 shows the array 110 of the same point, and the effective sample area of FIG. 21 covered on the blue plane sampling area 123 of FIG. 8, where the sample point 122 of FIG. 21 and the red (red reconstructed point) of FIG. 11 35) and green (green reconstruction point 37) "check boards, the arrays do not have the same spatial resolution grid, nor do they overlap. The calculation method for generating this conversion equation is performed as described above. First, That is to determine the size of the repeated array of the three-color pixel element. Next, determine the minimum number of unique coefficients, and then determine each corresponding output sample -45- Γ'year wide moon Japan point 23 input sample area 120 to Outputs the values of those coefficients whose proportionality overlaps the sample region 123. Each of these values is applied to the conversion equation. The former has checked the RGB format of the CRT. A conventional RGB flat panel display configuration 10 has three tri-color pixels. The red 4, green 6, and blue 2 emitters in element 8 are as in the previous art of Figure 1. In order to project a formatted image to the three-color pixel element according to this configuration, as shown in Figure 6 or Figure 10 Must decide Structure points. The placement of the red, green, and blue reconstruction points is shown in configuration 12 in Figure 2. The red, green, and blue reconstruction points do not coincide with each other, and they have a horizontal displacement. According to Benzschawel et al. In the prior art disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 5,341,153, and later in Hill et al. U.S. Patent No. 6,188,385, these positions are referred to as sample points 3, 5, and 7 with sample areas, as shown in Figure 3 The red plane 14 shown in the previous art, the blue plane 16 shown in the previous art in FIG. 4, and the green plane 18 shown in the previous art in FIG. 5. A conversion equation can be calculated from FIG. The prior art configuration presented in 4 and 5 is generated by the method disclosed therein. In the method disclosed above, it can be utilized by calculating the coefficients of the conversion equation, or the filter core, for the selected prior art Each output sample point configured. Figure 25 shows the active sample area 125 of the red plane of FIG. 3 covered on the red plane sampling area 52 of FIG. 13, where the configuration of the red emitter 35 in FIG. Figures 6 and 10 Set the same pixel degree (repeated unit resolution). The method of generating the conversion equation is calculated as described above. First, determine the size of the repeated array of the three-color pixel element. Then the minimum number of unique coefficients That is, it is determined by noticing the symmetry (-46- ^ 23 | 0417 in this example:-; a. 9a 12.-〇 '-; :: :: "is 2 >. Then, those coefficients can be determined The values overlap with the proportionality of the input sample area 125 to the output sample area 52 for each corresponding output sample point 35. Each of these values is applied to the conversion equation. As shown in FIG. 4, the resampling The calculation of the green plane is performed in a similar manner, but the output sample array is rotated by 180. And offset the green input sample area 127. FIG. 26 shows the blue-plane sampling area 123 of FIG. 8 overlaid on the blue-plane sampling area 127 of the prior art blue plane of the prior art. FIG. 40 shows an example of blue corresponding to the red and green samples in FIG. The sample area 266 in FIG. 40 is square instead of diamond in the red and green examples. The number of original pixel boundaries 272 is the same, but there are fewer blue output pixel boundaries 274. The coefficient is calculated as described above; the area covered by the presentation area 266 for each input sample area 268 is measured, and then divided by the total area of the presentation area 266. In this example, the blue sampling area 266 equally covers the four original pixel areas 268, resulting in a 2x2 filter core with four coefficients of 1/4. The eight other blue output pixel regions 270 and their geometric intersection with the original pixel region 268 can be seen in the symmetrical relationship of the filter obtained in FIG. 40. The symmetry of the original pixel boundary 274 in each output pixel region 270 Observed in the configuration. In a more complex example, a computer program is used to generate the blue filter core. This program finds a program very similar to the one that generates the red and green filter cores. The distance between the blue sub-pixel sample point 33 and the red and green sample points 35, 37 in FIG. 11 is twice the distance. It is suggested that the blue rendering area will be twice as wide. However, the red and green areas are diamond-shaped, so they are twice as wide as the interval between the sample points. This makes the red, green-47-Ir_… a year, month, day and blue and the blue and blue rendering areas have the same width and height, which results in several convenient numbers; the size of the blue filter core will be The size is equal to red and green. At the same time, the blue repeating unit size will usually be equal to the red and green repeating unit sizes. Because the interval between the blue sub-pixel sample points 33 is doubled, the ratio of P: S (pixel to sub-pixel) is doubled. For example, the ratio of 2: 3 in red becomes 4: 3 in blue. However, the number of S in this ratio determines the size of the repeating unit, and it is not changed by doubling. However, if the denominator happens to be divided by 2, it can complete an additional optimization. In this example, the two numbers in blue are divided by an extra power of two. For example, if the red and green P: S ratio is 3: 4, the blue ratio will be 6: 4, which can be simplified to 3: 2. This means that in these (even) examples, the blue repeating unit size can be cut in half, and the total number of filter cores required will be one quarter of the red and green. Conversely, in order to simplify the algorithm or hardware design, it is possible to make the blue repeating unit size equal to red and green. The resulting combination of filter cores will have a double (in fact, four times), but its work is equivalent to the red and green combination of the filter core. Therefore, the only correction required to use the red and green filter core programs to generate the blue filter core is to double the P: S ratio and change the presentation area to a square, not a rhombus. Now consider the configuration 20 of FIG. 6 and the blue sample area 124 of FIG. 9. This is similar to the previous example where the blue sample area 124 is square. However, its calculations are complicated because each of its spaced rows is intersected up or down at half its height. At first glance, it seems that the repeating unit size -48- ΓΙ2380ΙΓ will be doubled horizontally. However, the following procedures have been found to generate the correct filter core: 1) Generate a repeating unit combination of a filter core, as if the blue sample points were not interleaved, as described above. Remember the rows and columns of the filter table of the repeating unit, the number of which starts from zero and ends at the size of the repeating unit minus 1 2) the even-numbered rows in the output image, the The filter is modified accordingly. The modulus in the repeated unit size of the output γ coordinate is selected to use which column is used in the core combination of the filter, the modulus in the repeated unit size of the X coordinate is selected to one row, and the Y selection column is told to be used That filter. 3) On the odd output line, before taking its modulus, subtract the Y coordinate from the repeated cell size. The X coordinate system is considered to be the same as the even line. This will select a filter core that is correct for the interleaved example of Figure 9. In some examples, it is possible to perform the modulus calculations in advance and interleave the tables of the filter cores in advance. Unfortunately, this only works with an even number of rows in an example of a repeating unit. If the repeating unit has an odd line, the modulo arithmetic selects the even line half the time and the other half is the odd line. Therefore, the calculation to interleave that row must be performed at the time the table is used, not in advance. Finally, consider the configuration 20 of FIG. 6 and the basket color sampling area 123 of FIG. 8. This system is similar to the previous example in that it has additional complexity for a hexagonal sample area. The first step to consider these hexagons is how to draw them correctly -49- | Ι23 # 04Κ · year .. month or month, or create a vector list of them in a computer program. For best accuracy, these hexagons must be the smallest area hexagons, but they will not be normal hexagons. A geometric proof can be easily implemented in Figure 41. The hexagonal sampling areas 123 of Figure 8 are 1/8 wider on each side than the square sampling area 276. At the same time, the upper and lower edges of the hexagonal sampling region 123 are narrower by 1/8 than the upper and lower edges of the square sampling region 276 at each end. Finally, please note that the hexagonal sampling area 123 and the square sampling area 276 have the same height. The filter cores of these hexagonal sampling regions 123 can be generated in the same geometrical manner as previously described, which are rhombic for red and green, or square for blue. The presenting area is a simple hexagon, and the overlapping area of these hexagons covering the surrounding input pixels is measured. Unfortunately, when using the slightly wider hexagonal sampling area 123, the size of the filter core sometimes exceeds a 3x3 filter, even while maintaining the adjustment ratio between 1: 1 and 1: 2. Analysis shows that if the adjustment ratio is between 1: 1 and 4: 5, the core size will be 40. If the adjustment ratio is between 4: 5 and 1: 2, the core size of the filter will be maintained at 3x3. (Note that because the hexagonal sampling area 123 is the same height as the square sampling area 276, and the vertical size of the filter core remains the same). Designing hardware for a wider filter core is not as difficult as constructing hardware to handle higher filter cores, so it is not reasonable for a hardware-based sub-pixel rendering / adjustment system to be made A 4x3 wave suppressor. However, other solutions are possible. When the adjustment ratio is between 1: 1 and 4: 5, the square sampling area 124 of FIG. 9 is used, which results in a -50- 1238 · f U · 12. —g-house 3x3 filter. When the adjustment ratio is between 4: 5 and 1: 2, the more accurate hexagonal sampling area 123 of FIG. 8 is used, and a 3x3 filter is also required. In this way, the hardware is simpler to maintain and can be constructed cheaper. The hardware only needs to be constructed for the size of a filter core, and the algorithm used to construct those filters is the only thing that changes. Similar to the square sampling area of Fig. 9, the hexagonal sampling area of Fig. 8 is staggered in each other row. Analysis shows that the same method of selecting the filter core of FIG. 9 described above will work for the hexagonal sampling area of FIG. Basically, this coefficient representing the core of the filter can be calculated as if the hexagon is not interlaced, even though it is usually interlaced. This makes the calculation simpler and avoids double the size of the table at the core of the filter. In the example of the diamond-shaped presentation area in Figs. 32 to 39, the area is calculated in a coordinate system designed so that all areas are integers and easy to calculate. This can often result in a larger total area, and the filter core must be divided by a larger number in use. Sometimes this results in the filter core not being a power of two, which makes the hardware design more difficult. In the example of Fig. 41, the extra width of the hexagonal rendering area 123 makes it necessary to multiply the coefficients of the filter core by an even larger number to make them all integers. In all these examples, it is preferable to find a way to limit the size of the divisor of the core coefficients of the filter. In order to make the hard hip easier to design, it is preferable to be able to pick the power of the divisor of two. For example, if all filter cores are designed to divide by 256, this division operation can be performed by an 8-bit right shift operation. Selecting 256 also guarantees that all filter core coefficients will be 8-bit values, which will meet the standard "byte width" of only -51-η read memory (ROM). Therefore, the following procedure is used to generate a filter core with a desired divisor. Since the preferred divisor is 256, it will be used in the following procedures. 1) Use floating-point arithmetic to calculate the area of the filter coefficients. Because this calculation is done offline beforehand, this does not increase the hardware cost of using the resulting table. 2) Divide each coefficient by the known total area of the rendering area and multiply by 256. This would result in a total of 256 filters if all arithmetic is done in floating point, but more steps must be made to construct the integer table. 3) Perform a binary search to find a carry point (between 0 · 0 and 1.0), which when converted to an integer makes the total number of filters 256. Binary search is a common algorithm well known in the industry. If this search is successful, it is complete. A binary search will fail to converge, and this can be detected by testing the loop for more than one execution. 4) If the binary search fails, find a reasonably large coefficient in the core of the filter and add or subtract a small number to force the filter's total to 256. 5) For a special example, check that the filter has a single value of 256. This value will not match a table of 8-bit bytes, where the maximum possible number is 255. In this special case, the single value is set to 255 (256-1), and 1 is added to one of the surrounding coefficients to ensure that the filter still adds up to 256. Fig. 31 shows that in this special case, the output sample configuration 40 of Fig. 11 is overlaid on the input sample configuration 70 of Fig. 15 when the adjustment ratio is one input pixel on every two output sub-pixels. In this configuration 200, when the original -52- 11¾¾1 data is no longer the sub-pixel presented, the pairing of the red emitter 35 in the three-color pixel element 39 will be considered as a combination, which is in the three-color The center of the pixel element 39 has a representative reconstruction point 33. Similarly, the two green emitters 37 in the three-color pixel element 39 are regarded as a single reconstruction point 33 at the center of the three-color pixel element 39. The blue emitter 33 is already at the center. Therefore, the 5 emitters can be regarded as if they reconstruct the sample points of the RGB data format if all three color planes are at the center. This can be regarded as the “essential mode” of this pixel configuration. ^ By resampling and rendering through sub-pixels, an image that has been sub-pixel rendered to another display with a different sub-pixel configuration can maintain many of the Improved original image quality. According to a specific embodiment, it is necessary to generate a transition from the image presented by this pixel to the configuration disclosed here. Please refer to FIGS. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 25 and 26 The method already disclosed above can be used, by calculating the coefficient of the conversion filter of each output sample point 35, as shown in FIG. 25, which is the target of the red input sample 5 displaced relative to the right of FIG. 3 Display configuration. The blue emitter is processed as described above, and it calculates the coefficients of the conversion filter of each output sample point of the blue input sample 7 by shifting the target display configuration relative to FIG. 4 ^. In the example of the green plane, as shown in FIG. 5, the input data is already presented as a sub-pixel, because the green data is still in the center, and the example for the non-sub-pixel presentation need not be changed. When the application of text rendered using sub-pixels is included on the sides of graphics and photos rendered along non-sub-pixels, it is preferable to detect that the sub-pixels are present at -53- 月 ί-jj and alternate between the above The spatial sampling filter is switched, but for the adjustment ratio, that is, the normal spatial sampling filter switched back to the area presented by non-subpixels, it is also described above. In order to construct this detector, you must first understand the subpixels What the rendered text looks like, what are its detectable features, and what distance is set from the image rendered by the non-subpixel. First, the pixels at the edges of the glyph rendered by the black and white subpixels will not be local Neutral color: R # G. However, the color will be neutral on several pixels. That is R ^ G. For images or text rendered by non-subpixels, neither of these conditions will occur. . Therefore, we have our own detector to test local R # G and R ^ G for several pixels. Because the sub-pixels on a RGB strip panel are rendered in one dimension, along the horizontal axis, one column Next column, The test is one-dimensional. The following is such a test: If Rx_2 + Rx_i + Rx + Rx + 1 + Rx + 2 three Gn + GxU + Gx + Gx + i + Gx · ^ or if Rx-i + Rx + Rx + 1 + Rx + 2 three Gx_2 + Gx_i + Gx + Gx + i apply another spatial filter for sub-pixel rendering input otherwise apply normal spatial filter In the example where the text is colored, in this form RxaGx There will be a relationship between the red and green components, where "a" is a constant. For black and white text, the value of "a" is 1. This test can be extended to detect colored, and black and white text: I238Q1 he 93. 12. If Rxd + Rxd + Rx + Rx + i + Rxu (aiGxj + Gxd + Gx + Gxw + Gxw) or another spatial filter of the input of the sub-pixel is applied, otherwise the normal spatial filter is applied 1 and GXR represent the values of the red and green components at the coordinates of the pixel row of "x". There can be a critical test to determine if R ^ G is close enough. Its value can be adjusted for best results. The length of the item and the spacing of the test can be adjusted to obtain the best results, but generally follow the above form. Fig. 27 shows the arrangement of three-color pixel elements in an array on three planes in a display device according to another embodiment. FIG. 28 shows the arrangement of the blue radiator pixel elements in the array of the device of FIG. 27. FIG. 29 shows the arrangement of the pixel elements of the green radiator in the array of the device of FIG. Fig. 30 shows the arrangement of the red radiator pixel elements in an array of the device of Fig. 27. This configuration and layout can be used for a projector-based display using three panels, each for red, green, and blue, which combines each image to project on a screen. The configuration and shape of the radiator can be fully matched to FIGS. 8, 13 and 14, which are sample regions of the configuration shown in FIG. 6. Therefore, the graphic generation, conversion equation calculation, and data format for the configuration of Fig. 6 disclosed herein will also work for the three-panel configuration of Fig. 27. For adjustment ratios higher than approximately 2: 3 and higher, the resampled data combination presented by the subpixels in the PenTileTM matrix configuration of the subpixel is more efficient in representing the resulting image. If you want to store and / or transmit -55- 嗲 ί2Net · Yellow ... ~ Poetry.Day 丨 • ”― * ·. *** · * ·· 1 ** ._ ·. **-** • See image It is expected to be displayed on a PenTileTM display and the adjustment ratio is 2: 3 or higher, which is preferably performed by resampling before storage and / or transmission to store in memory storage space and / or bandwidth. This resampled image is called "pre-rendering". So this pre-rendering can be used as an effective low-loss compression algorithm. The benefit of the present invention is that it can take any most of the stored images and pre-render them To any achievable color sub-pixel configuration. Other benefits of the present invention are disclosed by way of example in the methods of FIGS. 46, 49, and 51, which can provide gamma compensation or adjustment using the above-mentioned sub-pixel rendering technology. These three methods of sub-pixel gamma adjustment can achieve correct image color balance on a display. The methods of Figures 49 and 51 can further improve the output brightness or illuminance by improving the output contrast ratio. Specifically, Figure 46 shows the sub-pixel rendering Previously applied a method of pre-adjusting gamma; FIG. 49 shows a method of sub-pixel presentation with a gamma adjustment; and FIG. 51 shows a method of sub-pixel presentation with gamma adjustment with an omega function. These methods The benefits are explained below. The methods of Figures 46, 49, and 51 can be applied to hardware, firmware, or software, as detailed in Figures 52A to 72. For example, the sample code included in the appendix It can be used for the method disclosed here. Because the human eye cannot distinguish between absolute brightness or illuminance values, it needs to improve the illuminance contrast ratio, especially at high spatial frequencies. By improving this contrast ratio, higher quality can be obtained Image, and can avoid color errors, as explained in detail below. The method to improve the contrast ratio is the effect of the gamma-adjusted sub-pixel presentation and the gamma-adjusted sub-pixel presentation with an omega function, which is -56-1238011. '「:: xiν」 丨 The maximum (MAX) / minimum (MIN) point of the modulation transfer function (MTF) at the Nyquist limit, as explained in detail in Figures 43, 44, 47, and 50. Clear Ground The gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering technology described here can shift the trend of the MAX / MIN point of the MTF downward to provide a high contrast of the output image, especially at high spatial frequencies, while maintaining the correct color balance The arrangement of the sub-pixels on a display, such as shown in FIGS. 6, 10, and 42B, has alternate red (R) or green (G) sub-pixels on one horizontal axis, or vertical axis, or on both axes. The gamma adjustment described here can also be applied to other display forms, which use a one-time pixel rendering function. That is, the technique described here can be applied to a display using the RGB bar format shown in FIG. 1. Figure 43 shows a sine wave of an input image, which has the same amplitude and increases the spatial frequency. FIG. 44 shows an exemplary graph of the output when the input image of FIG. 43 is sub-pixel rendered without gamma adjustment. The graph of the output ("output energy") shows that the amplitude of the output energy decreases as the spatial frequency increases. As shown in Figure 44, 50% of the MTF value means that the output amplitude at the Nyquist limit is half the amplitude of the original input image or signal. The MTF value can be calculated by dividing the energy amplitude of the output by the energy amplitude of the input: (MAXQut-MINQUt) / (MAXin-MINin). This Nyquist is limited to the point of the input signal sampled at frequency (f), which is at least twice as large as the frequency of reconstruction (f / 2). In other words, the Nyquist is limited to the highest point of the spatial frequency, where an input signal can be reconstructed. The Sparrow is limited to the spatial frequency at MTF = 0. Therefore, measurements at this Nyquist limit, such as contrast ratio -57- i and: i! Year and month & l | cases, can be used to determine image quality. The contrast ratio of the output energy at the Nyquist limit in Fig. 44 can be calculated by dividing the output MAX bright energy level by the output MIN black energy level. As shown in Figure 4, the MAX bright energy level is 75% of the maximum output energy level, and the MIN black energy level is 25% of the maximum output energy level. With this, the contrast ratio can be determined by dividing these] VIAX / MIN values, and a contrast ratio of 75% / 25% = 3 is provided. Therefore, at contrast ratio = 3 and high spatial frequency, the corresponding output of the graph of FIG. 44 on a display will describe alternating dark and bright rods, so that the edge of the rod will have lower sharpness and contrast . That is, a black bar from the input image will be displayed as a dark gray bar, and a white bar from the input will be displayed as a light gray bar at a high spatial frequency. By using the method of Figs. 49 and 51, the contrast ratio can be improved by shifting the MAX and MIN points of the MTF downward. In short, the MTF at the Nyquist limit of the gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering method of Fig. 49 is shown in Fig. 47. As shown in Figure 47, the MTF can be shifted downward along a flat trend line, so that compared to the MTF in Figure 44, the MAX value is 65% and the MIN value is 12.5%. The contrast ratio of the Nyquist limit in Figure 47 is therefore 63% / 12.5% = 5 (approximately). With this, the contrast ratio can be improved from 3 to 5. The contrast ratio at the Nyquist limit can be further improved using the method of gamma adjustment with an omega function of Figure 51. Figure 50 shows that the MTF can be shifted further down a downward trend line, so that compared to the MTF in Figure 47, the MAX value is 54.7%, and the MIN value is 4.7% ° at the Nyquist limit The comparison ratio is 54.7% / 4.7% = 11.6 (approximately). Therefore, the contrast -58-ττ: π

比例已經由5改進到11.6,藉此允許顯示出高品質影像。 圖45所示為一範例性圖形,以描述彩色誤差,其可使用 不具有伽瑪調整之次像素呈現而發生。人眼對於照度的反 應之簡短的討論即用來詳細說明該呈現的次像素之彩色 的,,伽瑪」效應。如前所述,人眼可在一百分比改變時經 歷到亮度改變,而不會隨一絕對輻射能量值改變。亮度(L) 及能量(Ε)之關係式為L=E1/Y。當該亮度增加時,在亮度中 所感知到的增加需要在輻射能量中較大的絕對性增加。藉 此,對於在一顯示器上對亮度所同等感知到的遞增,每個 增量必須比上一個為對數性地較高。在L及E之間的此關 係係稱之為一 π伽瑪曲線π,並由g(x)=x1/Y所代表。一大約為 2.2之伽瑪值(γ丨可代表人眼的對數需求。 習用的顯示器可由執行圖45中所示的一顯示伽瑪函數 來補償上述之人眼的需求。但是,該次像素呈現處理需要 一線性照度空間。也就是說,一次像素,例如一綠色次像 素或紅色次像素,照度輸出必須具有落在該直線性虛線圖 形上的數值。因此,當具有非常高的空間頻率之次像素呈 現的影像係顯示在具有一非為1之伽瑪值的顯示器上,因 為該次像素的照度值並未平衡,會發生彩色誤差。 明確地說,如圖45所示,該紅色及綠色次像素無法得到 一線性關係。特定言之,該綠色次像素係設定來提供50% 之照度,其可代表在該顯示器上的一白點邏輯像素。但 是,該綠色次像素的照度輸出落在該顯示函數之25 %處, 而非在50%。此外,該白點的周圍四個次像素(例如紅色 —識頁 次像素)之照度可設定來每個提供12.5 %之照度,但落在該 顯不函數之1.6%處,而不是在12.5%處。該白點像素及該周 圍像素的照度百分比必須加到最高1〇〇%。因此,為了具有 正確的彩色平衡,在該周圍次像素之中需要一線性關係。 但是該四個周圍次像素僅具有[6^^4=6.4%,其係遠低於該 中央次像素所需要的2 5 %。因此,在此例中,該中央彩色 相較於周圍彩色較重要,藉此造成彩色誤差,即產生一彩 色點來取代該白點。在更為複雜的影像上,由該非線性顯 示器所引發的彩色誤差可對於在該對角線方向上具有高 空間頻率之部份會產生誤差。 以下的圖46、49及51之方法可應用一轉換(伽瑪修正或 調整)在該線性次像素呈現的資料,藉以使該次像素呈現 可位在一正確的線性空間。如以下的詳細說明,以下的方 法可對於呈現的次像素提供正確的彩色平衡。圖49及51 之方法可進一步改進該呈現的次像素資料的對比。 為了解釋起見,以下的方法係使用最高的像素對次像素 比例(P:S)為1:1之解析度來說明。也就是說,對於該一像 素對一次像素解析度,其使用一具有3x3係數項次的濾波 器核心。然而,例如藉由使用適當數目的3x3濾波器核心, 可以賣施其它的P : S比例。舉例而言,在P : S比例為4 : 5之 情況中,其可使用上述的25濾波器核心。 在該一像素對一次像素呈現中,如圖42A所示,對於一 紅色或綠色次像素的一重新取樣區域282的输出值(Vw), 其可使用該9個指示的樣本區域280之输入值(Vin:)來計算。 -60- ;I238QI l· 此外,為了解釋起見,以下的方法係使用圖42B所示的一 次像素配置來說明。然而,以下的方法可對其它次像素配 置來實施,例如圖6及10,藉由對於紅色及綠色次像素使 用下述的計算及公式,並對於那些藍色次像素執行適當的 修正。 圖46所示為一方法300的流程圖,其係在次像素呈現之 前應用一預調整伽瑪。初始時,接收到9個指示的樣本區 域280之输入取樣的資料(Vin)(步驟302),例如在圖42A中所 不〇 接下來,每個ViM數值係輸入到由函數g-\X;)=XY所定義的 計算(步驟304)。此計算稱之為,,預調整伽瑪,,,並可參考一 預調整伽瑪查找表(LUT)來執行。此g-1⑻函數為該人眼的反 應函數的倒數之函數。因此,當人眼旋轉時,在該預調整 伽瑪之後所得到的該次像素呈現的資料可匹配於眼睛的 反應函數,以得到使用該g·1⑻函數的原始影像。 在執行預調整伽瑪之後,次像素呈現使用前述的次像素 呈現技術來進行(步驟306)。如先前的詳細說明,對於此次 像素呈現步驟,該濾波器核心係數項次Ck中相對應的一個 乘以來自步驟304之數值,並相加所有該相乘的項次。該 係數項次Ck係由一濾波器核心係數表所接收(步驟308)。 舉例而言,紅色及綠色次像素可在步驟306中計算如下: V〇ut(CxRy)=0.5xg-1(Vin(CxRy))+0.125xg-1(Vin(Cx_iRy))+ 0.125xg_1+(Vin(Cx+1Ry))+0.125xg-1(Vin(CxRy_1))+ 0A25xg\Win(CxRy+l)) -61 -The ratio has been improved from 5 to 11.6, thereby allowing high-quality images to be displayed. Figure 45 shows an exemplary graph to describe color errors that can occur using sub-pixel rendering without gamma adjustment. A brief discussion of the human eye's response to illuminance is used to specify the color, gamma, effect of the sub-pixels that are presented. As mentioned earlier, the human eye can experience a change in brightness as a percentage change without changing with an absolute radiant energy value. The relationship between brightness (L) and energy (E) is L = E1 / Y. As this brightness increases, the perceived increase in brightness requires a larger absolute increase in radiant energy. Thus, for an equally perceived increase in brightness on a display, each increment must be logarithmicly higher than the previous one. This relationship between L and E is called a π gamma curve π and is represented by g (x) = x1 / Y. A gamma value of approximately 2.2 (γ 丨 can represent the logarithmic needs of the human eye. Conventional displays can compensate for the above-mentioned needs of the human eye by performing a display gamma function shown in FIG. 45. However, the sub-pixel rendering Processing requires a linear illuminance space. That is, for a primary pixel, such as a green subpixel or red subpixel, the illuminance output must have a value that falls on the linear dotted line pattern. Therefore, when there is a very high spatial frequency The image presented by the pixel is displayed on a display with a non-gamma value, because the sub-pixel's illuminance value is not balanced, and a color error will occur. Specifically, as shown in Figure 45, the red and green colors The sub-pixel cannot get a linear relationship. In particular, the green sub-pixel is set to provide 50% illumination, which can represent a white point logical pixel on the display. However, the illumination output of the green sub-pixel falls on 25% of the display function, not 50%. In addition, the illuminance of the four sub-pixels around the white point (for example, red-page sub-pixel) can be set to each Provides 12.5% illumination, but falls at 1.6% of the apparent function, not at 12.5%. The illumination percentage of the white point pixels and the surrounding pixels must be added up to 100%. Therefore, in order to have the correct For color balance, a linear relationship is required among the surrounding sub-pixels. However, the four surrounding sub-pixels only have [6 ^^ 4 = 6.4%, which is much lower than the 25% required by the central sub-pixel. Therefore, in this example, the central color is more important than the surrounding colors, thereby causing a color error, that is, generating a color point to replace the white point. On more complex images, the non-linear display The color error can produce errors for the part with high spatial frequency in the diagonal direction. The following method of Figure 46, 49 and 51 can apply a conversion (gamma correction or adjustment) to the Data, so that the sub-pixel rendering can be located in a correct linear space. As detailed below, the following methods can provide the correct color balance for the sub-pixels presented. The methods of Figures 49 and 51 can further improve the rendering For the sake of explanation, the following method uses the highest resolution of the pixel-to-subpixel ratio (P: S) to be 1: 1. That is, for a pixel to a pixel Resolution, which uses a filter core with 3x3 coefficient terms. However, for example, by using an appropriate number of 3x3 filter cores, other P: S ratios can be sold. For example, the P: S ratio is In the case of 4: 5, it can use the above-mentioned 25 filter cores. In this one-pixel-to-one-pixel rendering, as shown in FIG. 42A, the output value of a resampled area 282 for a red or green sub-pixel ( Vw), which can be calculated using the input value (Vin :) of the nine indicated sample areas 280. -60-; I238QI l · In addition, for the sake of explanation, the following method uses the primary pixel shown in FIG. 42B Configuration to illustrate. However, the following method can be implemented for other sub-pixel configurations, such as FIGS. 6 and 10, by using the following calculations and formulas for the red and green sub-pixels, and performing appropriate corrections for those blue sub-pixels. FIG. 46 shows a flowchart of a method 300 that applies a pre-adjusted gamma before sub-pixel rendering. Initially, the input sampled data (Vin) of 9 indicated sample areas 280 is received (step 302), for example, as shown in FIG. 42A. Next, each ViM value is input to the function g- \ X; ) = Calculation defined by XY (step 304). This calculation is called, pre-adjusted gamma, and can be performed with reference to a pre-adjusted gamma lookup table (LUT). This g-1⑻ function is a function of the inverse of the reaction function of the human eye. Therefore, when the human eye rotates, the data presented by the sub-pixel obtained after the pre-adjusted gamma can match the response function of the eye to obtain the original image using the g · 1⑻ function. After performing the pre-adjusted gamma, the sub-pixel rendering is performed using the aforementioned sub-pixel rendering technique (step 306). As previously explained in detail, for this pixel rendering step, the corresponding one of the filter core coefficient term Ck is multiplied by the value from step 304, and all the multiplied term times are added. The coefficient term Ck is received by a filter core coefficient table (step 308). For example, the red and green sub-pixels can be calculated in step 306 as follows: V〇ut (CxRy) = 0.5xg-1 (Vin (CxRy)) + 0.125xg-1 (Vin (Cx_iRy)) + 0.125xg_1 + (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) + 0.125xg-1 (Vin (CxRy_1)) + 0A25xg \ Win (CxRy + l)) -61-

在步驟306及308之後,該次像素呈現的資料乂_即對於一 給定的顯示伽瑪函數接受一後伽瑪修正(步驟310> —顯示 伽瑪函數係以f(X)代表,並可代表一典型的非1伽瑪函 數,例如對於一液晶顯示器。為了達到次像素呈現 之線性度,該顯示伽瑪函數即以一後伽瑪修正函數f\x) 來辨識及消除,其可由計算f(x)的倒數來產生。後伽瑪修 正允許該次像素呈現的資料來到達人眼,而沒有來自該顯 示器的干擾。然後,該後伽瑪修正的資料即輸出到該顯示 器(步驟312>以上在次像素呈現之前的圖46之應用預調整 伽瑪之方法可對於所有的空間頻率提供適當的彩色平 衡。圖46的方法亦可提供至少對於低空間頻率之正確的亮 度或照度位準。 但是,在高空間頻率下,使用圖46之方法來得到該呈現 的次像素之適當的照度或亮度值仍有問題。明確地說,在 高空間頻率下,次像素呈現需要線性計算,並根據其平均 亮度,該亮度值將由預期的伽瑪調整的數值來發散。因為 除了在零及100%之外的所有數值,該正確值可低於該線性 計算,其會造成該線性計算出的亮度數值太高。此會造成 在黑色背景上過量及太白的文字,而在白色背景上無法完 全消除黑色文字。 如上所述,對於圖4 6之方法,線性彩色平衡可在該線性 次像素呈現之前,使用應用g-1(X)=Xγ的預調整伽瑪步驟來達 到。對於在高空間頻率下影像品質的進〜步改進可藉由實 施一所要的非線性照度計算來達到,如下所述。 -62- 123賴复 對於次像素呈現的進一步改進可使用圖49及51之方法 來對於適當的照度或亮度值來得到,其可造成該MTF在 Nyquist限制處的MAX及MIN點,以向下變化,藉此進一步改 進在高空間頻率下的對比比例。特定言之,以下的方法允 許非線性照度計算,而維持線性彩色平衡。 圖49所示為用於伽瑪調整的次像素呈現之方法350的流 程圖。該方法350可應用或加入一伽瑪修正,所以該非線 性照度計算可以在不會造成彩色誤差之下來進行。如圖47 所示,圖49之伽瑪調整的次像素呈現之範例性輸出信號顯 示一平均能量,然後為一平坦的趨勢線在25%(對應於50% 的亮度),其係由圖44之50 % (對應於73 %的亮度)向下偏 移。 對於圖49之伽瑪調整的次像素呈現方法350,請參考圖 48而引入一”局部平均(〇〇”的觀念。一局部平均的觀念為 一次像素的照度必須與其周圍的次像素相平衡。對於每一 個邊緣項次(VJCyRw)、VJCxU、VJCwRw)、VJCwRy)、 Vin(Cx+1Ry)、VJCyRw)、Vin(CxRy+1)、Vin(Cx+1Ry+1)),該局部平 均係定義成與該中央項次(Vin(CxRy))的平均值。為於該中央 項次,該局部平均值係定義成所有環繞該中央項次的邊緣 項次之平均值,並由該濾波器核心之相對應係數項次所加 權。例如, (Vir^CuD + VidCxRy:))·^為 V^CyRy)的局部平均值,而 (Vin(Cx_1Ry) + Vin(CxRy+1) + Vin(Cx+1Ry) + Vin(CxRy_1) + 4xVin (CxRy;〇+8為以下的濾波器核心之中央項次的局部平均值 -63-After steps 306 and 308, the data presented by the sub-pixel 乂 is to accept a post-gamma correction for a given display gamma function (step 310 >-the display gamma function is represented by f (X), and Represents a typical non-1 gamma function, for example, for a liquid crystal display. In order to achieve the linearity of sub-pixel presentation, the display gamma function is identified and eliminated by a post-gamma correction function f \ x), which can be calculated by f (x) is generated. Post-gamma correction allows the data presented by this sub-pixel to reach the human eye without interference from the display. Then, the post-gamma correction data is output to the display (step 312 > The method of applying pre-adjusted gamma in FIG. 46 before sub-pixel rendering above can provide appropriate color balance for all spatial frequencies. The method can also provide the correct level of brightness or illuminance at least for low spatial frequencies. However, at high spatial frequencies, using the method of FIG. 46 to obtain the appropriate illuminance or brightness value of the sub-pixels presented remains problematic. Clear In other words, at high spatial frequencies, the sub-pixel rendering needs to be calculated linearly, and according to its average brightness, the brightness value will diverge from the expected gamma-adjusted value. Because all values except zero and 100%, the The correct value can be lower than the linear calculation, which will cause the linearly calculated brightness value to be too high. This will cause excessive and too white text on a black background, and black text cannot be completely eliminated on a white background. As mentioned above, For the method of Figure 46, the linear color balance can be obtained by applying a pre-adjusted gamma step of g-1 (X) = Xγ before the linear sub-pixel is rendered. To. Further improvement of image quality at high spatial frequencies can be achieved by implementing a desired non-linear illuminance calculation, as described below. -62- 123 Lai Fu For further improvements in sub-pixel rendering, use Figure 49 And the method of 51 is obtained for the appropriate illuminance or brightness value, which can cause the MAX and MIN points of the MTF at the Nyquist limit to change downward, thereby further improving the contrast ratio at high spatial frequencies. In other words, the following method allows non-linear illuminance calculation while maintaining linear color balance. Figure 49 shows a flowchart of a method 350 for sub-pixel rendering for gamma adjustment. The method 350 can apply or add a gamma correction, Therefore, the non-linear illumination calculation can be performed without causing color error. As shown in FIG. 47, the exemplary output signal presented by the gamma-adjusted sub-pixel in FIG. 49 shows an average energy, and then a flat trend line at 25% (corresponding to 50% brightness), which is shifted downward from 50% (corresponding to 73% brightness) of Fig. 44. For the gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering method 350 of Fig. 49, Referring to FIG. 48, the concept of "local average (〇〇") is introduced. The concept of a local average is that the illumination of a pixel must be balanced with the surrounding sub-pixels. For each edge term (VJCyRw), VJCxU, VJCwRw, VJCwRy), Vin (Cx + 1Ry), VJCyRw), Vin (CxRy + 1), Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1)), the local average is defined as the average value with the central term (Vin (CxRy)) . For the central term, the local average is defined as the average of all the edge term surrounding the central term, and is weighted by the corresponding coefficient term of the filter core. For example, (Vir ^ CuD + VidCxRy :)) · ^ is the local average of V ^ CyRy), and (Vin (Cx_1Ry) + Vin (CxRy + 1) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy_1) + 4xVin (CxRy; 0 + 8 is the local average of the central term of the filter core below -63-

Official

0 0.125 0 0.125 0.5 0.125 0 0.125 00 0.125 0 0.125 0.5 0.125 0 0.125 0

請參考圖49,初始時接收到9個指定的樣本區域280之取 樣的输入資料Vin,例如圖42所示(步驟352)。接著,每個8 個邊緣項次的局部平均(〇〇即使用每個邊緣項次Vin及該中 央項次Vin來計算(步驟354)。基於這些局部平均,一 π預伽 瑪”修正即使用例如一預伽瑪LUT來計算為步驟 356>。該預伽瑪修正函數為其必須注意到,其 使用而非χγ,因為該伽瑪調整的次像素呈現使得x(在此 例中為Vin)在稍後的步驟366及368中相乘。對於每個邊緣項 次之預伽瑪修正的結果乘以一相對應的係數項次CK,其係 由一濾波器核心係數表360所接收(步驟358)。Please refer to FIG. 49. Initially, the input data Vin sampled from 9 designated sample areas 280 is received, as shown in FIG. 42 (step 352). Next, a local average of each of the 8 edge terms (0 is calculated using each edge term Vin and the central term Vin (step 354). Based on these local averages, a π pre-gamma "correction is used For example, a pre-gamma LUT is calculated as step 356>. The pre-gamma correction function must be noted that it is used instead of χγ because the gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering makes x (Vin in this example) Multiply in later steps 366 and 368. The result of pre-gamma correction for each edge term is multiplied by a corresponding coefficient term CK, which is received by a filter core coefficient table 360 (step 358).

對於該中央項次,至少有兩個計算可用來決定g—ka)。對 於一個計算(1),該局部平均(a)係如上述基於該中央項次 局部平均而使用g—'a)來對於該中央項次計算,如上所述。 對於一第二計算(2),一伽瑪修正的局部平均(“GA”)即藉 由使用該周圍的邊緣項次之步驟358的結果來對該中央項 次計算。圖49的方法350使用計算(2)。該中央項次的“GA” 可使用來自步驟358之結果來計算,而非步驟3 56,以參考 邊緣係數,如果每個邊緣項次對於該中央項次局部平均具 有不同的貢獻,例如如果具有相同彩色的尖銳化,如以下 -64- 123 8W % 所述。 該中央項次的“GA”亦乘以一相對應的係數項次CK,其自 一濾波器核心係數表所接收(步驟364)。該兩個計算(1)及 (2)如下所示: (1) g'ViViniC.^R^+V^CxR^O+Vi^C^tR^+Vi, (CxRy.1)+4xVin(CxRy)H8) (2) ((g'\(Vin(Cx.1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))-2)+g-V(Vin(CxRy+1)+ Vin(CxRy))^2)+g-1((Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))-2)+g·1 ((νίη((:χυ+νίη((:χ;^))+2)) +4) 來自步驟358之CK g·1⑹數值,以及來自步驟364使用第二 計·算(2)之CK“GA”數值即乘以一相對應的項次Vin(步驟366 及368)。然後,所有相乘的項次之總和即被計算(步驟370) 來產生输出次像素呈現的資料V(>ut。然後,-後伽瑪修正 即應用到VQUt,並輸出到該顯示器(步驟372及374)。 為了使用計算(1)來計算V_,對於紅色及綠色次像素的 以下計算如下所示: V〇ut(CxRy)=Vin(CxRy)x〇.5x (CxRy.1)+4xVin(CxRy)K8) +Vin(Cx.1Ry)x〇.l25xg-1((Vin(Cx.1Ry)+Vin(CxRy)H2) +Vin(CxRy+〇x〇.l25xg-1((Vin(CxRy+1)+Vin(CxRy)K2) +Vin(Cx+lRy)x〇.i25xg'((V^C.^R^+Vi^C.Ry))^) +Vin(CxRy-1)x〇.125xg_1((Vin(CxRy.1)+Vin(CxRy))+2) 該計算(2)利用與該周圍項次相同的方式來計算該中央 Γζΐ3#(ΜΚ !火 / 93. if. *" s q i 年 J:] tl I...…..…二一—--------- 項次的局部平均。此結果可消除一彩色誤差,其在如果使 用第一計算(υ時仍可引入。 來自步驟370之輸出,使用對於該紅色及綠色次像素之 第二計算(2),如下所示:For this central term, at least two calculations can be used to determine g-ka). For a calculation (1), the local average (a) is calculated for the central term using g-'a) based on the central term local average as described above. For a second calculation (2), a gamma-corrected local average ("GA") is calculated for the central term by using the result of step 358 of the surrounding edge term. The method 350 of FIG. 49 uses calculations (2). The "GA" of the central term can be calculated using the results from step 358 instead of steps 3 56 to refer to the edge coefficients if each edge term has a different contribution to the local average of the central term, for example if it has Sharpening of the same color, as described below -64- 123 8W%. The "GA" of the central term is also multiplied by a corresponding coefficient term CK, which is received from a filter core coefficient table (step 364). The two calculations (1) and (2) are as follows: (1) g'ViViniC. ^ R ^ + V ^ CxR ^ O + Vi ^ C ^ tR ^ + Vi, (CxRy.1) + 4xVin (CxRy ) H8) (2) ((g '\ (Vin (Cx.1Ry) + Vin (CxRy))-2) + gV (Vin (CxRy + 1) + Vin (CxRy)) ^ 2) + g-1 ( (Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy))-2) + g · 1 ((νίη ((: χυ + νίη ((: χ; ^)) + 2)) +4) CK g from step 358 · 1⑹ value, and the value of CK "GA" from step 364 using the second calculation · (2) is multiplied by a corresponding term Vin (steps 366 and 368). Then, the sum of all multiplied terms It is calculated (step 370) to generate the output sub-pixel rendered data V (> ut. Then, the -post-gamma correction is applied to VQUt and output to the display (steps 372 and 374). To use the calculation (1 ) To calculate V_, the following calculations for the red and green sub-pixels are as follows: V〇ut (CxRy) = Vin (CxRy) x 0.5x (CxRy.1) + 4xVin (CxRy) K8) + Vin (Cx. 1Ry) x〇.l25xg-1 ((Vin (Cx.1Ry) + Vin (CxRy) H2) + Vin (CxRy + 〇x〇.l25xg-1 ((Vin (CxRy + 1) + Vin (CxRy) K2) + Vin (Cx + lRy) x〇.i25xg '((V ^ C. ^ R ^ + Vi ^ C.Ry)) ^) + Vin (CxRy-1) x〇.125xg_1 ((Vin (CxRy.1) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) The calculation (2) utilizes this The central term is calculated in the same way as the central Γζΐ3 # (ΜΚ! 火 / 93. if. * &Quot; sqi year J:] tl I ...… ..… two one —--------- Local average of terms. This result can eliminate a color error, which can still be introduced if the first calculation (υ) is used. The output from step 370 uses the second calculation (2) for the red and green sub-pixels, As follows:

Vout(CxRy)=Vin(CxRy)x0.5x ((g_1((Vin(Cx-1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))+2)+g-1((Vin(CxRy+1)+Vout (CxRy) = Vin (CxRy) x0.5x ((g_1 ((Vin (Cx-1Ry) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + g-1 ((Vin (CxRy + 1) +

Vin(CxRy)) + 2) +g \(Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy)K2)Vk(Vin(CxRy-i)+Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + g \ (Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy) K2) Vk (Vin (CxRy-i) +

Vin(CxRy)) + 2 )) + 4) +Vin(Cx.1Ry)x〇.125xg-1((Vin(Cx.1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))^2) +Vin(CxRy+1)x〇.125xg-1((Vin(CxRy+1)+Vin(CxRy))+2) +Vin(Cx+1Ry)x〇.125xg-1((Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))+2) +Vin(CxRy_1)x〇.125xg_1((Vin(CxRy.1)+Vin(CxRy)H2) 以上該第二計算(2)之公式在數值上與代數上得到與該 第一計算(1)在一伽瑪組合2.〇時有相同的結果。但是,對 於其它的伽瑪設定,該兩個計算可用該第二計算(2)收 斂,而可在任何伽瑪設定之下提供正確的彩色呈現。 該第一計算(1)之藍色次像素的伽瑪調整之次像素呈現 的公式如下所示: V〇ut(Cx+l/2Ry)- +Vin(CxRy)x0.5x g-1((4xVin(CxRy)+Vin(Cx.1Ry)+Vin(CxRy+1)+Vin (C^RyhV^CxUHS) +Vin(Cx+iRy)x〇.5x -66-Vin (CxRy)) + 2)) + 4) + Vin (Cx.1Ry) x 0.125xg-1 ((Vin (Cx.1Ry) + Vin (CxRy)) ^ 2) + Vin (CxRy + 1) x 〇.125xg-1 ((Vin (CxRy + 1) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) x 0.125xg-1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + Vin (CxRy_1) x.125xg_1 ((Vin (CxRy.1) + Vin (CxRy) H2) The formula of the second calculation (2) above is obtained numerically and algebraically with the first calculation (1 ) Has the same result in a gamma combination of 2.0. However, for other gamma settings, the two calculations can be converged with the second calculation (2), but can provide the correct value under any gamma setting. Color rendering. The formula for the sub-pixel rendering of the gamma adjustment of the blue sub-pixel in the first calculation (1) is as follows: V〇ut (Cx + l / 2Ry)-+ Vin (CxRy) x0.5x g- 1 ((4xVin (CxRy) + Vin (Cx.1Ry) + Vin (CxRy + 1) + Vin (C ^ RyhV ^ CxUHS) + Vin (Cx + iRy) x0.5x -66-

g-1((4xVin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy)+Vin(Cx+1Ry.1)+Vin(Cx+1Ry+1) +Vin(Cx+2Ry))+8) 使用一4x3濾波器之第二計算的藍色次像素之公式 如下所示: V〇ut(Cx+i/2Ry)= +Vjn(CxRy)x0.5x ((g-1((Vin(Cx_1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))+2)+g_1((Vin(CxRy+1)+g-1 ((4xVin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry.1) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1) + Vin (Cx + 2Ry)) + 8) Use a 4x3 filter The formula for the second calculated blue sub-pixel is as follows: V〇ut (Cx + i / 2Ry) = + Vjn (CxRy) x0.5x ((g-1 ((Vin (Cx_1Ry) + Vin (CxRy) ) +2) + g_1 ((Vin (CxRy + 1) +

Vin(CxRy))+2) +g-1((Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy)H2)+g-1((Vin(CxRy-1)+Vin (CxRy))+2))+4) +Vin(Cx+1Ry)x0.5x ((g'1((Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))^2)+g-1((Vin (Cx+1Ry+1)+Vin(Cx+1Ry)H2) +g-1((Vin(Cx+2Ry)+Vin(Cx+1Ry))^2) +g-1((Vin(Cx+1Ry_1)+Vin(Cx+1Ry))+2))+4) 使用一 3x3濾波器之第二計算(2:)的藍色次像素之公式 做為一近似值即如下所示: V0Ut(Cx+i/2Ry) +Vin(CxRy)xO. 5 x ((g-l((Vin(CxRy+〇+Vin(CxRy))^2)+g-H(Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + g-1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy) H2) + g-1 ((Vin (CxRy-1) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2)) + 4) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) x0.5x ((g'1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy)) ^ 2) + g-1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) H2) + g-1 ((Vin (Cx + 2Ry) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) ^ 2) + g-1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry_1) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) +2)) + 4) The formula of the blue sub-pixel using the second calculation (2 :) of a 3x3 filter as an approximation is as follows: V0Ut (Cx + i / 2Ry) + Vin (CxRy) xO 5 x ((gl ((Vin (CxRy + 〇 + Vin (CxRy)) ^ 2) + gH (Vin (Cx + 1Ry) +

Vin(CxRy))^2)+g-V(Vin(CxRy_1)+Vin(CxRy))-f2))-3) +Vin(Cx+1Ry)x0.5x ((g-\(Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))^2)+g-\(Vin(Cx+1Ry+1)+Vin (CxRy)) ^ 2) + gV (Vin (CxRy_1) + Vin (CxRy))-f2))-3) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) x0.5x ((g-\ (Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy)) ^ 2) + g-\ (Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1) +

Vin(Cx+1Ry))^2)+g-1((Vin(Cx+1Ry_1)+Vin(Cx+1Ry))^2))^3)Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) ^ 2) + g-1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry_1) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) ^ 2)) ^ 3)

該伽瑪調整的次像素呈現方法350即使在一較高的空間 頻率下同時提供正確的彩色平衡及正確的照度。該非線性 照度計算係使用一函數來執行,其對於該滤波器核心中的 每個項次之形式為V^fVinxCKxa。如果設定a=Vin及CK=1,該 函數將傳回等於該伽瑪調整的數值Vin的數值,如果該伽 瑪設定為2。為了提供一函數來傳回調整到伽瑪為2.2或一 些其它所要的值之數值,該ν^=Σ VinxCKXg'a)的形式可用 於上述的公式。此函數亦可對於所有的空間頻率來維持所 要的伽瑪。 如圖47所示,使用該伽瑪調整的次像素呈現演算法之影 像可在所有的空間頻率之下具有較高的對比及正確的亮 度。使用該伽瑪調整的次像素呈現方法350的另一個好處 在於由一查找表所提供的該伽瑪可基於任何所要的函 數。因此,對於顯示器之所謂的“sRGB,,標準伽瑪亦可實 施。此標準具有一接近黑色的線性區域,以取代該指數曲 線,當其到達黑色時其斜率趨近於〇,以降低所需要的位 元數目,並降低雜訊敏感度。 圖49所示的伽瑪調整的次像素呈現演算法亦可執行高 斯差異(DOG)尖銳化來藉由使用如下所示的該,,一像素對 一次像素」調整模式的濾波器核心來尖銳化文字的影像: -0.0625 0.125 -0.0625 0.125 0.75 0.125 -0.0625 0.125 -0.0625The gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering method 350 simultaneously provides correct color balance and correct illuminance even at a higher spatial frequency. The non-linear illuminance calculation is performed using a function, which is in the form V ^ fVinxCKxa for each term in the filter core. If a = Vin and CK = 1 are set, the function will return a value equal to the value of the gamma Vin, if the gamma is set to 2. To provide a function to return a value adjusted to a gamma of 2.2 or some other desired value, the form of ν ^ = Σ VinxCKXg'a) can be used in the above formula. This function also maintains the desired gamma for all spatial frequencies. As shown in Figure 47, images using this gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering algorithm can have high contrast and correct brightness at all spatial frequencies. Another benefit of using the gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering method 350 is that the gamma provided by a lookup table can be based on any desired function. Therefore, for the so-called "sRGB" of the display, standard gamma can also be implemented. This standard has a linear region close to black to replace the exponential curve. When it reaches black, its slope approaches 0 to reduce the required The number of bits is reduced, and the noise sensitivity is reduced. The gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering algorithm shown in Figure 49 can also perform Gaussian Difference (DOG) sharpening by using the following, a pixel pair The filter core of the "one-pixel" adjustment mode to sharpen the text image: -0.0625 0.125 -0.0625 0.125 0.75 0.125 -0.0625 0.125 -0.0625

對於DOG尖銳化,該第二計算(2)的公式如下所示: V〇ut(CxRy)-Vin(CxRy)x〇.75x ((2xg-k(Vin(Cx.1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))^2)+2xg-\(Vin(CxRy+〇For DOG sharpening, the formula of the second calculation (2) is as follows: ) ^ 2) + 2xg-\ (Vin (CxRy + 〇

Vin(CxRy))+2) +2xg_1((Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))+2)+2xg_1((Vin(CxRy_1)+Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + 2xg_1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + 2xg_1 ((Vin (CxRy_1) +

Vin(CxRy))+2) +g-k(Vin(Cx.1Ry+〇+Vin(CxRy))-2)+g-1((Vin(Cx+1Ry+1)+Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + g-k (Vin (Cx.1Ry + 〇 + Vin (CxRy))-2) + g-1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1) +

Vin(CxRy))+2) +g_1((Vin(Cx+1Ry-1)+Vin(CxRy))+2)+g-1((Vin(Cx_1Ry-1)+Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + g_1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry-1) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + g-1 ((Vin (Cx_1Ry-1) +

Vin(CxRy)) +.2))+12) +Vin(Cx.1Ry)x0.125xg-1((Vin(Cx.1Ry)+Vin(CxRy)H2) +Vin(CxRy+〇x0.125xg-1((Vin(CxRy+1)+Vin(CxRy))-2) +Vin(Cx+1Ry)x0.125xg-1((Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))+2) +Vin(CxRy_1)x0.125xg_1((Vin(CxRy_1)+Vin(CxRy))+2) -Vin(Cx.1Ry+1)x0.0625xg-1((Vin(Cx_1Ry+1)+Vin(CxRy))-2) -Vin(Cx+1Ry+1)x0.0625xg-1((Vin(Cx+1Ry+1)-fVin(CxRy))-2) -Vin(Cx+1Ry.1)x0.0625xg-l((Vin(Cx+1Ry.1)+Vin(CxRy))-2) -Vin(Cx.1Ry.1)x0.0625xg-1((Vin(Cx.1Ry.1)+Vin(CxRy))-2) 相較於對角線項次,該序數平均項次的係數為2之理由 為在該濾波器核心中的比例為0.125:0.0625=2。此可保持每 個對該局部平均的貢獻為相等。 此DOG尖銳化可提供該基本空間頻率之奇數諧波,其係 -69- fmmmk …Vin (CxRy)) +.2)) + 12) + Vin (Cx.1Ry) x0.125xg-1 ((Vin (Cx.1Ry) + Vin (CxRy) H2) + Vin (CxRy + 〇x0.125xg-1 ((Vin (CxRy + 1) + Vin (CxRy))-2) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) x0.125xg-1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + Vin (CxRy_1 ) x0.125xg_1 ((Vin (CxRy_1) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) -Vin (Cx.1Ry + 1) x0.0625xg-1 ((Vin (Cx_1Ry + 1) + Vin (CxRy))-2) -Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1) x0.0625xg-1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1) -fVin (CxRy))-2) -Vin (Cx + 1Ry.1) x0.0625xg-l ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry.1) + Vin (CxRy))-2) -Vin (Cx.1Ry.1) x0.0625xg-1 ((Vin (Cx.1Ry.1) + Vin (CxRy))-2) phase Compared to the diagonal term, the coefficient of the ordinal average term is 2 because the ratio in the filter core is 0.125: 0.0625 = 2. This keeps each contribution to the local average equal. This DOG sharpening can provide odd harmonics of this fundamental spatial frequency, which is -69- fmmmk…

Ej 對於垂直及水平行程之像素邊緣所造成。以上所示的dog 尖銳化濾波器自該角落借用相同彩色的能量,將其置於中 心,因此該DOG尖銳化的資料當人眼旋轉時即成為一小的 聚焦點。此種尖銳化稱之為相同彩色尖銳化。 該尖銳化的量可由改變該中間及角落濾波器核心係數 來調整。該中間係數可在0.5及0.75之間變化,而該角落係 數可在0及-0.0625之間變化,而其總和為1。在上述的範例 性濾波器核心中,自每個該四個角落採取0.0625,而這些 的總和(即0.0625x4=0.25)即加入到該中央項次,因此其由〇.5 增加到0.75。 一般而言,具有尖銳化的滅波器核心可表示如下:Ej is caused by the pixel edges of vertical and horizontal strokes. The dog sharpening filter shown above borrows the same colored energy from the corner and places it at the center, so the DOG sharpened data becomes a small focus point when the human eye rotates. This sharpening is called the same color sharpening. The amount of sharpening can be adjusted by changing the core coefficients of the middle and corner filters. The intermediate coefficient can be changed between 0.5 and 0.75, and the corner coefficient can be changed between 0 and -0.0625, and the sum is 1. In the above exemplary filter core, 0.0625 is taken from each of the four corners, and the sum of these (ie, 0.0625x4 = 0.25) is added to the central term, so it is increased from 0.5 to 0.75. In general, a sharpened core of a waver can be expressed as follows:

cirx C21 C31"X c12 C22+4X c32 c13-x c23 C33-X 其中(-X)係稱之為一角落尖銳化係數;( + 4x:)稱之為一中 央尖銳化係數:及卜^…^^“稱之為呈現係數。 為了進一步增加該影像品質,包含該四個角落及該中心 的尖銳化係數可使用相反的彩色輸入影像值。此種尖銳化 稱之為交叉彩色尖銳化,因為該尖銳化係數使用輸入影像 值,其彩色係相反於該呈現係數。該交叉彩色尖銳化可降 低該尖銳化的飽和彩色線或文字之趨勢而看起來為點 狀。即使相反的彩色來執行該尖銳化,並非相同的彩色, -70- fl謂職 Y年处另― 該總能量在照度或色差中並未改變,而該彩色維持相同。 此係因為該尖銳化係數造成該相反彩色的能量朝向中心 移動,但平衡為OGx-x+Ax-x-x^O)。 如果使用該交叉彩色尖銳化,先前的公式可由自該呈現 項次分離出該尖銳化項次來簡化。因為該尖銳化項次並不 影響該影像的照度或色差,而僅影響該能量的分佈,即可 省略使用該相反彩色之尖銳化係數的伽瑪修正。因此,以 下的公式可用來取代先前的公式: V〇ut(CxRy)=Vin(CxRy)x0.5xcirx C21 C31 " X c12 C22 + 4X c32 c13-x c23 C33-X where (-X) is called a corner sharpening coefficient; (+ 4x :) is called a central sharpening coefficient: and ... ^^ "It is called the rendering coefficient. In order to further increase the image quality, the sharpening coefficients including the four corners and the center can use the opposite color input image values. This sharpening is called cross-color sharpening because The sharpening coefficient uses the input image value, and its color is opposite to the rendering coefficient. The cross-color sharpening can reduce the tendency of the sharpened saturated color lines or text to appear pointy. Even if the opposite color is used to perform Sharpening, not the same color, -70- fl is different from Y years-the total energy does not change in illumination or chromatic aberration, and the color remains the same. This is because the sharpening coefficient causes the energy of the opposite color Move towards the center, but the balance is OGx-x + Ax-xx ^ O). If you use this cross-color sharpening, the previous formula can be simplified by separating the sharpening term from the rendering term. Because the sharpening term Times It does not affect the illuminance or chromatic aberration of the image, but only affects the energy distribution, and the gamma correction using the sharpening coefficient of the opposite color can be omitted. Therefore, the following formula can be used instead of the previous formula: V〇ut (CxRy ) = Vin (CxRy) x0.5x

((g-Wv^CdRyHv^CxRyDeHg-WvjCxU +Vin(CxRy))+2) +g-1((Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))+2)+g_1((Vin(CxRy_1)+((g-Wv ^ CdRyHv ^ CxRyDeHg-WvjCxU + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + g-1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + g_1 ((Vin (CxRy_1) +

Vin(CxRy))+2))+4) +Vin(Cx.1Ry)x0.125xg-1((Vin(Cx.1Ry)+Vin(CxRy)K2) +Vin(CxRy+1)x0.125xg_1((Vin(CxRy+1)+Vin(CxRy)K2) +Vin(Cx+1Ry)x0.125xg-1((Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy)K2) +Vin(CxRy_1)x0.125xg-1((Vin(CxRy-1)+Vin(CxRy))+2) (其中以上的Vin為全紅或全綠值) +Vin(CxRy)x0.125Vin (CxRy)) + 2)) + 4) + Vin (Cx.1Ry) x0.125xg-1 ((Vin (Cx.1Ry) + Vin (CxRy) K2) + Vin (CxRy + 1) x0.125xg_1 ( (Vin (CxRy + 1) + Vin (CxRy) K2) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) x0.125xg-1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy) K2) + Vin (CxRy_1) x0.125xg- 1 ((Vin (CxRy-1) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) (where the above Vin is a full red or green value) + Vin (CxRy) x0.125

HiUxO.03125 -Vin(Cx+1Ry+1)x〇.03125 -νίη(εχ+1υχ〇.〇3ΐ25 71 ·HiUxO.03125 -Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1) x〇.03125 -νίη (εχ + 1υχ〇.〇3ΐ25 71 ·

23^(M K23 ^ (M K

(其中以上的vin分別為全綠或全紅,並相反於在以上段落 中所選擇的vin) 相同及交叉的彩色尖銳化之混合可如下所示:(Where the above vin are all green or red, respectively, and opposite to the vin selected in the above paragraph) The same and crossed color sharpening mix can be shown as follows:

Vout(CxRy)=Vin(CxRy)x0.5x ((g_1((Vin(Cx_1Ry)+Vin(CxRy)H2)+g-1((Vin(CxRy+1)+Vout (CxRy) = Vin (CxRy) x0.5x ((g_1 ((Vin (Cx_1Ry) + Vin (CxRy) H2) + g-1 ((Vin (CxRy + 1) +

Vin(CxRy))+2) +g-1((Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy)H2)+g-1((Vin(CxRy_1) +Vin(CxRy))+2))+4) +Vin(Cx_1Ry)x0.125xg_1((Vin(Cx_1Ry)+Vin(CxRy))+2) +Vin(CxRy+1)x0.125xg-1((Vin(CxRy+1)+Vin(CxRy)H2) +Vin(Cx+1Ry)x0.125xg-l((Vin(Cx+1Ry)+Vin(CxRy)K2) +Vin(CxRy_1)x0.125xg-1((Vin(CxRy_1)+Vin(CxRy))+2)Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + g-1 ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy) H2) + g-1 ((Vin (CxRy_1) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2)) + 4) + Vin (Cx_1Ry) x0.125xg_1 ((Vin (Cx_1Ry) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2) + Vin (CxRy + 1) x0.125xg-1 ((Vin (CxRy + 1) + Vin (CxRy) H2) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) x0.125xg-l ((Vin (Cx + 1Ry) + Vin (CxRy) K2) + Vin (CxRy_1) x0.125xg-1 ((Vin (CxRy_1) + Vin (CxRy)) + 2)

+Vin(CxRy)x0.0625 -VinCC^^^OxO.015625 -Vin(Cx+1Ry+1)xO.015625 -VinCC^^y.OxO.015625 -VinCC^^y.OxO.015625 (其中以上的Vin為全紅或全綠值) +Vin(CxRy)x0.0625 -VinCC.^Ry+OxO.015625 -V in(Cx+iRy+i)xO.015625 -Vi^C.^Ry.OxO.015625 -72- |ι—Μ I年一月 &ί -Vi^Cx^Ry.OxO.015625 (其中以上的Vin分別為全綠或全紅,並相反於在以上段落 中所選擇的Vin) 在這些使用交叉彩色尖銳化的簡化公式中,該係數項次 為具有伽瑪調整之相同彩色尖銳化者的一半。也就是說, 該中央尖銳化項次成為0.25的一半,其等於0.125,而該角 落尖銳化項次成為0.625之一半,其等於0.03125。此係因為 若不具有伽瑪調整,該尖銳化具有較大的效果。 僅有該紅色及綠色通道可得到尖銳化的好處,因為人眼 不能夠感知到藍色的細部。因此,藍色的尖銳化並不在此 具體實施例中執行。 以下之圖51的方法,用於具有一歐米茄函數的伽瑪調整 之次像素呈現,其可控制伽瑪值,而不會造成彩色誤差。 簡言之,圖50所示為回應於圖43的输入信號,一具有歐 米茄函數的該伽瑪調整之次像素呈現的範例性输出信 號。根據該不具有歐米茄修正的伽瑪調整次像素呈現,該 呈現的伽瑪值對所有的空間頻率皆增加,因此該高空間頻 率的對比比例即增加,如圖47所示。當進一步增加該伽瑪 值時,例如在白色背景上的黑色文字之細部對比亦會進一 步增加。但是,增加所有空間頻率的伽瑪值會產生不能接 受的相片及視訊影像。 圖5 1之具有歐米茄修正的伽瑪調整次像素呈現方法可 選擇性地增加該伽瑪值。也就是說,在該高空間頻率下的 伽瑪值在當該零空間頻率的伽瑪值留在其最佳點時即增 -73 - •呤 •呤 年 日! 加。因此,隨著該空間頻率變得較高,由該伽瑪調整的呈 現向下偏移的該输出信號波的平均即進一步向下偏移,如 圖50所示。在零頻率下的平均能量為2 5%(對應於50%的亮 度),而在Nyquist限制處減少到9 · 5 % (對應於3 5 %的亮度), 如果ω=0.5。 圖5 1所示為包含一系列具有伽瑪調整的次像素呈現之 步驟的方法400。基本上,該歐米55函數,w(x)=x1/co(步驟 404),在接收到输入資料Vin(步驟402)之後插入,並在將該 資料接受該局部平均計算之前(步驟406>該歐米茄修正的 局部平均(β),其自步驟406输出,其在該,,預伽瑪」修正中 接受到該倒轉的歐米茄函數w'xfx%步驟408)。因此,步驟 408稱之為”具有歐米茄的預伽瑪”修正,而 g·、·1的計算 係執行為,例如參考一LUT形式的具有歐米 茄表之預伽瑪。 該函數為一倒轉的伽瑪式的函數,而w'x:)為具有相 同歐米茄值的一伽瑪式的函數。該術語,,歐米茄」之選擇 即如同經常在電子裝置中所使用者,以代表一信號頻率, 其單位為弧度。此函數會較多地造成較高的空間頻率,而 不會較少。也就是說,歐米茄及倒轉歐米茄函數不會改變 在較低空間頻率下的輸出值,但在較高空間頻率下具有一 較大的影響。 如果以“Vi”及“V2”代表兩個局部輸入數值,其為兩個局 部數值,該局部平均值(〇〇及該歐米茄修正的局部平均(β) 如下所示: -74- - - L—年 月 n\ (ν!+ν2)/2=α ;及(XVD+wCV〗))/]^。當 VfVz,β=\ν(ο〇。因此, 在低空間頻率下,g-V、户g_V^h^gla)。但是,在高空 間頻率下(Vl#V2),g-iw-i((5>g-i⑹。在最高的空間頻率及對 比下,g-1w-1(p)«g_1w-1(a)。 換言之,具有歐米茄之伽瑪調整的次像素呈現使用的函 數形式為 VouteVinxCKXg-VWwC^+wC^:^),其中 g'xhx7-1、 w(x)=x1/G))及。使用該函數的結果是低空間頻率呈現 出一伽瑪值為g-1,然而高空間頻率係有效地呈現一伽瑪值 g·、·1。當該歐米茄值設定低於1時,一較高的空間頻率具 有一較高的有效伽瑪值,其為在黑色與白色之間的一較高 的對比。 在圖51之具有歐米茄的預伽瑪之後的運作係類似於圖 49的那些步驟。對於每個邊緣項次之具有歐米茄修正的預 伽瑪之結果乘以一相對應的係數項次CK,其係由一濾波器 核心係數表412中讀出(步驟410)。對於該中央項次,有至 少兩種方法來計算對應於的數值。第一種方法以相 同的方式計算該邊緣項次的數值,而第二種方法執行圖51 中步驟414之計算,來加總步驟408之結果。步驟414的計算 可使用步驟410之結果,而非步驟408,以代表在計算該中 央項次之邊緣係數,當每個邊緣項次可對於該中央項次局 部平均具有一不同的貢獻時。 來自步驟414之中央項次的該具有歐米茄的伽瑪修正局 部平均(“GOA”)亦乘以一相對應的係數項次CK(步驟416)。來 自步驟410之數值,以及來自步驟416使用該第二計算(2)之 -75- . 93:12:'~8^^ 數值,即乘以一相對應的項次Vin(步驟418及420)。然後, 所有相乘的項次之總和即計算(步驟422)來输出次像素呈 現的資料V。^。然後,施加一後伽瑪修正到,並输出到 該顯示器(;步驟424及426)。 舉例而言,來自步驟422使用該第二計算(2)避免之輸出 對於紅色及綠色次像素即如下所示:+ Vin (CxRy) x0.0625 -VinCC ^^^ OxO.015625 -Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1) xO.015625 -VinCC ^^ y.OxO.015625 -VinCC ^^ y.OxO.015625 (where the above Vin is all red or green value) + Vin (CxRy) x0.0625 -VinCC. ^ Ry + OxO.015625 -V in (Cx + iRy + i) xO.015625 -Vi ^ C. ^ Ry.OxO.015625 -72- | ι—Μ January of the year & ί -Vi ^ Cx ^ Ry.OxO.015625 (where the above Vins are all green or red, respectively, as opposed to the Vin selected in the above paragraph) in In these simplified formulas using cross-color sharpening, the coefficient term is half that of the same color sharpening with gamma adjustment. That is, the central sharpening term becomes half of 0.25, which is equal to 0.125, and the angular sharpening term becomes half of 0.625, which is equal to 0.03125. This is because if there is no gamma adjustment, this sharpening has a greater effect. Only the red and green channels have the benefit of sharpening because the human eye cannot perceive the blue details. Therefore, the sharpening of blue is not performed in this specific embodiment. The following method of FIG. 51 is used for the sub-pixel rendering of gamma adjustment with an omega function, which can control the gamma value without causing color errors. In brief, FIG. 50 shows an exemplary output signal of the gamma-adjusted sub-pixel with an omega function in response to the input signal of FIG. 43. The sub-pixel rendering is adjusted based on the gamma without Omega correction, and the rendered gamma value increases for all spatial frequencies, so the contrast ratio of the high spatial frequency increases, as shown in Figure 47. When the gamma value is further increased, for example, the detailed contrast of black text on a white background will be further increased. However, increasing the gamma value of all spatial frequencies will produce unacceptable photos and video images. The gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering method with omega correction in FIG. 51 can selectively increase the gamma value. In other words, the gamma value at the high spatial frequency increases when the gamma value of the zero spatial frequency remains at its optimal point -73-• plus. Therefore, as the spatial frequency becomes higher, the average of the output signal wave exhibiting a downward shift adjusted by the gamma is further shifted downward, as shown in FIG. 50. The average energy at zero frequency is 25% (corresponding to 50% brightness), and it is reduced to 9 · 5% (corresponding to 35% brightness) at the Nyquist limit, if ω = 0.5. FIG. 51 illustrates a method 400 including a series of sub-pixel rendering steps with gamma adjustment. Basically, the Omega 55 function, w (x) = x1 / co (step 404), is inserted after receiving the input data Vin (step 402), and before accepting the data for the local average calculation (step 406) The Omega-corrected local average (β), which is output from step 406, receives the inverted Omega function w'xfx% step 408) in the pre-gamma correction. Therefore, step 408 is called "pre-gamma with omega" correction, and the calculation of g ·, · 1 is performed, for example, with reference to a pre-gamma with omega watch in the form of a LUT. This function is an inverted gamma-like function, and w'x :) is a gamma-like function with the same omega value. The term, "Omega" is chosen as it is often used in electronic devices to represent a signal frequency in radians. This function will result in higher spatial frequencies rather than fewer. In other words, the omega and inverse omega functions do not change the output value at lower spatial frequencies, but have a larger effect at higher spatial frequencies. If "Vi" and "V2" are used to represent the two local input values, which are two local values, the local average value (〇〇 and the Omega-corrected local average (β) are as follows: -74---L —Year n \ (ν! + Ν2) / 2 = α; and (XVD + wCV〗)) /] ^. When VfVz, β = \ ν (ο〇. Therefore, at low spatial frequencies, g-V, g_V ^ h ^ gla). However, at high spatial frequencies (Vl # V2), g-iw-i ((5> g-i⑹. At the highest spatial frequency and contrast, g-1w-1 (p) «g_1w-1 (a) In other words, the function form for subpixel rendering with Omega's gamma adjustment is VouteVinxCKXg-VWwC ^ + wC ^: ^), where g'xhx7-1, w (x) = x1 / G)) and. The result of using this function is that a low spatial frequency exhibits a gamma value of g-1, while a high spatial frequency system effectively exhibits a gamma value of g ·, · 1. When the omega value is set below 1, a higher spatial frequency has a higher effective gamma value, which is a higher contrast between black and white. The operation after the pre-gamma with Omega of Fig. 51 is similar to those of Fig. 49. For each edge term, the result of pre-gamma with omega correction is multiplied by a corresponding coefficient term CK, which is read from a filter core coefficient table 412 (step 410). For this central term, there are at least two ways to calculate the corresponding value. The first method calculates the value of the edge term in the same way, and the second method performs the calculation of step 414 in Fig. 51 to add up the result of step 408. The calculation of step 414 can use the result of step 410 instead of step 408 to represent the edge coefficient of the central term, when each edge term can make a different contribution to the central term's local average. The Omega-corrected local average ("GOA") from the central term of step 414 is also multiplied by a corresponding coefficient term CK (step 416). The value from step 410, and -75- from step 416 using the second calculation (2). 93: 12: '~ 8 ^^ value, that is, multiplied by a corresponding term Vin (steps 418 and 420) . Then, the sum of all multiplied terms is calculated (step 422) to output the data V represented by the sub-pixels. ^. Then, a post-gamma correction is applied to and output to the display (; steps 424 and 426). For example, the output avoided from step 422 using the second calculation (2) for red and green sub-pixels is as follows:

Vout(CxRy)=Vin(CxRy)x0.5x ((g-1W1((w(Vin(Cx.1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy)))^2) +g'1W1((w(Vin(CxRy+1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))^2) +g1W1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy)))^2) +g_V-1((w(Vin(CxRy.1))+w(Vin(CxRy))K2))^4) +Vin(Cx.1Ry)x0.125xg-1w-1((w(Vin(Cx.1Ry))+w(Vill(CxRy)))-2) +Vin(CxRy+1)x0.125xg'1w'1 ((w(Vin(CxRy+1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))+2) +Vin(Cx+1Ry)x〇· 125xg-1w-1 ((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy))H2) +Vin(CxRy_1)x〇.125xg-V1((w(Vin(CxRy_1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))+2) 該紅色及綠色次像素的額外範例性公式,可利用上述簡 化的方式來由交叉彩色尖銳化與角落尖銳化係數(X)來改 進先前的公式,其如下所示: V〇ut(CxRy)=Vin(CxRy)x0.5x ((g'1W1((w(Vin(Cx.1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy)))-2) +g-1w'1((w(Vin(CxRy+1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))-2) 日丨 +g-1w-1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy)))^2) +g-1w-1((w(Vin(CxRy.1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))^2))^4) +Vin(Cx_1Ry)x0.125xg-1w-1((w(Vin(Cx.1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy))K2) +Vin(CxRy+1)x0.125xg-1w-1((w(Vin(CxRy+1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))^2) +Vin(Cx+1Ry)x0.125xg-1w-1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy))K2) +Vin(CxRy_1)x0.125xg-1w_1((w(Vin(CxRy_1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))+2) +Vin(CxRy)x4x -Vin(CX_l Ry + 1 ) xx -Vin(Cx+1Ry+i)xxVout (CxRy) = Vin (CxRy) x0.5x ((g-1W1 ((w (Vin (Cx.1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) ^ 2) + g'1W1 ((w (Vin ( CxRy + 1)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) ^ 2) + g1W1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) ^ 2) + g_V-1 ((w ( Vin (CxRy.1)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) K2)) ^ 4) + Vin (Cx.1Ry) x0.125xg-1w-1 ((w (Vin (Cx.1Ry)) + w (Vill (CxRy)))-2) + Vin (CxRy + 1) x0.125xg'1w'1 ((w (Vin (CxRy + 1)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) + 2) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) x.125xg-1w-1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) H2) + Vin (CxRy_1) x〇.125xg-V1 ((w (Vin (CxRy_1) ) + w (Vin (CxRy))) + 2) This additional exemplary formula for the red and green sub-pixels can use the simplified method described above to improve the previous formula by the cross-color sharpening and corner sharpening coefficients (X). , Which is as follows: V〇ut (CxRy) = Vin (CxRy) x0.5x ((g'1W1 ((w (Vin (Cx.1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy)))-2) + g -1w'1 ((w (Vin (CxRy + 1)) + w (Vin (CxRy)))-2) day 丨 + g-1w-1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) ^ 2) + g-1w-1 ((w (Vin (CxRy.1)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) ^ 2)) ^ 4) + Vin (Cx_1Ry) x0.125xg- 1w-1 ((w (Vin (Cx.1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) K2) + Vin (CxRy + 1) x0.125xg-1w-1 ((w (Vin (CxRy + 1)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) ^ 2) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) x0.125xg-1w-1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) K2) + Vi n (CxRy_1) x0.125xg-1w_1 ((w (Vin (CxRy_1)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) + 2) + Vin (CxRy) x4x -Vin (CX_l Ry + 1) xx -Vin (Cx + 1Ry + i) xx

-VinCCx+^y.OxX -VinCCx^Ry.Oxx 對於藍色次像素之具有歐米茄函數之伽瑪調整的次像 素呈現之公式如下所示: V〇ut(Cx+./2Ry)= · +Vin(CxRy)xO. 5 x ((g-1w-1((w(Vin(Cx.1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy)))^2) +g_1((w(Vin(CxRy+1))+w(Vin(CxRy))K2) +g-V1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy)))+2) +g-l((w(Vin(CxRy.1))+w(Vin(CxRy))^2))^4) +Vin(Cx+1Ry)x0.5x ((g-1w-1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy))K2) +g_1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry+1))+w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))H2) -77- +g_1w-1((w(Vin(Cx+2Ry))+w(Vin(Cx+1Ry)))+2) +g'1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry.1))+w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))^2))^4} 該對於超本質調整(即調整比例為1:2或更高)之具有交 叉彩色尖銳化的具有歐米茄的伽瑪調整之呈現之一般性 公式對於該紅色及綠色次像素可表示如下: V0Ut(CcRr)二 Vin(CxRy)xc22x ((g-1W1((w(Vin(Cx.1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy)))^2) +g-1w-1((w(Vin(CxRy+1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))^2) +g-1W1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy)))^2) +g-1w*\(w(Vin(CxRy.1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))^2))^4) +Vin(Cx.1Ry)xc12xg-1w-1((w(Vin(Cx.1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy))H2) +Vin(CxRy+1)xC23xg_V1((w(Vin(CxRy+1))+w(Vin(CxRy))H2) +Vin(Cx+1Ry)xc32xg-1W1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy))K2) +Vin(CxRy_1)xc21xg-V1((w(Vin(CxRy1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))+2) +Vin(Cx_1Ry+1)xCl3xg-1W-1((w(Vin(Cx_1Ry+1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))+2) +Vin(Cx+1Ry+1)xc33Xg_lw"1 ((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry+1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))+2) +Vin(Cx+1Ry_1)xc31xg-V1((W(Vin(Cx+1Ry_1))+w(Vin(CxRy))H2) +Vin(Cx_1Ry_1)xc11xg-1W-1((w(Vin(Cx_1Ry_1))+W(Vin(CxRy))H2) +Vin(CxRy)x4x-VinCCx + ^ y.OxX -VinCCx ^ Ry.Oxx The formula for the sub-pixels with gamma adjustment of the Omega function for the blue sub-pixels is as follows: V〇ut (Cx +. / 2Ry) = · + Vin (CxRy ) xO. 5 x ((g-1w-1 ((w (Vin (Cx.1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) ^ 2) + g_1 ((w (Vin (CxRy + 1)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) K2) + g-V1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) + 2) + gl ((w (Vin (CxRy.1)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) ^ 2)) ^ 4) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) x0.5x ((g-1w-1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) K2 ) + g_1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1)) + w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) H2) -77- + g_1w-1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 2Ry)) + w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry))) + 2) + g'1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry.1)) + w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) ^ 2)) ^ 4} The adjustment for the super essence ( That is, the general formula for the representation of the gamma adjustment with Omega with cross-color sharpening and an adjustment ratio of 1: 2 or higher can be expressed as follows for the red and green sub-pixels: V0Ut (CcRr) Di Vin (CxRy) xc22x ((g-1W1 ((w (Vin (Cx.1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) ^ 2) + g-1w-1 ((w (Vin (CxRy + 1)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) ^ 2) + g-1W1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) ^ 2) + g-1w * \ (w (Vin (CxRy.1) ) + w (Vin (CxRy))) ^ 2)) ^ 4) + Vin (Cx.1Ry) xc12xg-1w-1 ((w (Vin (Cx.1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) H2) + Vin (CxRy + 1) xC23xg_V 1 ((w (Vin (CxRy + 1)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) H2) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry) xc32xg-1W1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy) ) K2) + Vin (CxRy_1) xc21xg-V1 ((w (Vin (CxRy1)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) + 2) + Vin (Cx_1Ry + 1) xCl3xg-1W-1 ((w (Vin ( Cx_1Ry + 1)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) + 2) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1) xc33Xg_lw " 1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) ) +2) + Vin (Cx + 1Ry_1) xc31xg-V1 ((W (Vin (Cx + 1Ry_1)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) H2) + Vin (Cx_1Ry_1) xc11xg-1W-1 ((w (Vin (Cx_1Ry_1)) + W (Vin (CxRy)) H2) + Vin (CxRy) x4x

-Vin(Cx_i Ry +1) XX -Vin(CX+lRy+i)XX ifmoiK1 … J 年月…y-Vin (Cx_i Ry +1) XX -Vin (CX + lRy + i) XX ifmoiK1… J year ... y

Vin(Cx+lRy-l)xx -V^CwUxx 該藍色次像素的相對應一般性公式如下所示: V0Ut(Cc+1/2Rr)=Vin (Cx + lRy-l) xx -V ^ CwUxx The corresponding general formula of the blue sub-pixel is as follows: V0Ut (Cc + 1 / 2Rr) =

+Vin(CxRy)xc22xR+ Vin (CxRy) xc22xR

+Vin(Cx+1Ry)xc32xR+ Vin (Cx + 1Ry) xc32xR

+Vin(Cx.iRy)xci2xR+ Vin (Cx.iRy) xci2xR

+Vin(CxRy_i)xc2ixR+ Vin (CxRy_i) xc2ixR

+Vin(Cx+iRy_i)xc31xR+ Vin (Cx + iRy_i) xc31xR

+Vin(Cx.iRy.1)xc11xR 其中 R=((g-1w-1((w(Vin(Cx]Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy)))+2) +g*1((w(Vin(CxRy+i))+w(Vin(CxRy)))-2) +g-V1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy)))+2) +g-1((w(Vin(CxRy1))+w(Vin(CxRy)))+2) +((g-1w-l(w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))+w(Vin(CxRy))K2) +g'1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry+1))+w(Vin(Cx+1Ry)))^2) +g-1w-1(w(Vin(Cx+2Ry))+w(Vin(Cx+1Ry)))^2) +g-1((w(Vin(Cx+1Ry.1))+w(Vin(Cx+1Ry))K2)K2)K8) 以上圖46、49及51之方法可由下述的範例性系統來實 施。用於在次像素呈現之預調整伽瑪之一種實施圖46之步 驟的系統範例係示於圖52A及52B。該範例性系統可使用 一薄膜電晶體(TFT)主動矩陣液晶顯示器(AMLCD)的面板上 顯示影像。其它種類可以用來寅施上述技術的顯示裝置包+ Vin (Cx.iRy.1) xc11xR where R = ((g-1w-1 ((w (Vin (Cx) Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) + 2) + g * 1 ((w (Vin (CxRy + i)) + w (Vin (CxRy)))-2) + g-V1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) + 2) + g- 1 ((w (Vin (CxRy1)) + w (Vin (CxRy))) + 2) + ((g-1w-l (w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) + w (Vin (CxRy)) K2) + g'1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry + 1)) + w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry))) ^ 2) + g-1w-1 (w (Vin (Cx + 2Ry)) + w ( Vin (Cx + 1Ry))) ^ 2) + g-1 ((w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry.1)) + w (Vin (Cx + 1Ry)) K2) K2) K8) Figures 46, 49 and above The method of 51 can be implemented by the following exemplary system. An example of a system for implementing the steps of FIG. 46 for pre-adjusted gamma presentation at sub-pixels is shown in FIGS. 52A and 52B. The exemplary system can use a thin film A transistor (TFT) active matrix liquid crystal display (AMLCD) panel displays images. Other types of display device packages that can be used to implement the above technologies

含陰極射線管(CRT)顯示裝置。 請參考圖52A,該系統包含一個人運算裝置(PC)501,其 耦合於具有一次像素處理單元500之次像素呈現模組5〇4。 PC 501可包含圖71之運算系統750的組件。圖52A的次像素呈 現模組504係耦合於圖52B中的一時序控制器(TCON)506,用 於控制输出到一顯示器的面板。其它種類可用於PC 501之 裝置包含一可攜式電腦、掌上型運算裝置、個人資料助理 (PDA)、或其它具有顯示器的類似裝置。次像素呈現模組 504可實施上述的調整次像素呈現技術,其具有圖46中所 述的伽瑪調整技術,以輸出次像素呈現的資料。 PC 501可包含一繪圖控制器或介面卡,例如一視訊繪圖 卡(VGA)來提供影像資料輸出到一顯示器。其它可使用的 VGA控制器種類包含UXGA及XGA控制器。次像素呈現模組 504可為一獨立的卡或板,其可設置成一場域可程式閘極 陣列(FPGA),其係程式化來執行圖46中所述的步驟。另 外,次像素處理單元500可包含在PC 501之繪圖卡控制器中 一特定應用積體電路(ASIC),其係用來在次像素呈現之前 執行預調整伽瑪。在另一範例中,次像素呈現模組504可 為一顯示器的面板之TCON 506中的一 FPGA或ASIC。再者, 該次像素呈現模組504可實施於連接在pc 501及TCON 506之 間的一或多個裝置或單元,用以输出影像在一顯示器上。 次像素呈現模組504亦包含一數位視覺介面(DVI)輸入 508,及一低電壓差分發信(LVDS)輸出526。次像素呈現模組 504可透過DVI輸入508來接收输入影像資料,例如在一標準 |I238Wt 的RGB像素格式,並在次像素呈現之前對該影像資料執行 預調整伽瑪。次像素呈現模組504亦可透過LVDS輸出526傳 送該次像素呈現的資料到TCON 506。LVDS輸出526可為一顯 示裝置的面板介面,例如一 AMLCD顯示裝置。依此方式, 一顯示器可利用一 DVI输出耦合到任何種類的繪圖控制器 或卡。 次像素呈現模組504亦包含一介面509連通於PC 501。介面 509可為一 I2C介面,其允許PC 501來控制或下載更新到該次 像素呈現模組504所使用的該伽瑪或係數表,並在一延伸 的顯示識別資訊(EDID)單元510中存取資訊。依此方式,伽 瑪值及係數值可調整成任何所要的值。EDID資訊的範例包 含關於一顯示器的基本資訊,及其能力,例如最大影像尺 寸、彩色特性、預設時序頻率範圍限制,或其它資訊。PC 501,例如在開機時,可讀取在EDID單元510中的資訊,以 決定其所連接的顯示器種類,以及如何傳送影像資料到該 顯不器。 在次像素呈現模組504中運作的次像素處理單元500之運 作來實施圖46之步驟,現在將加以說明。為了解釋起見, 次像素處理單元500包含處理方塊512到524,其係實施在一 大型FGPA中,其具有任何數目的邏輯組件或電路,及儲存 裝置來儲存伽瑪表及/或係數表。儲存這些表的儲存裝置 之範例包含唯讀記憶體(ROM)、隨機存取記憶體(RAM),或 其它類似的記憶體。 開始時,PC 501透過DVI 508傳送一输入影像資料Vin(例如 -81 - ifii3tS¥ … L.—一土.„—.··】‘…一,'.·! 一標準RGB格式的像素資料)到次像素呈現模組504。在其 它範例中,PC 501可傳送一次像素格式的输入影像資料 Vin,如上所述。PC 501傳送vin的方式可基於EDID單元510中 的資訊。在一範例中,在PC 501中的一繪圖控制器傳送紅 色、綠色及藍色次像素資料到次像素呈現單元500。輸入 閂鎖及自動偵測方塊512偵測由DVI 508所接收的影像資 料,並閂鎖該像素資料。時序緩衝器及控制方塊514提供 緩衝邏輯來在次像素處理單元500內緩衝該像素資料。此 處,在方瑰514中,時序信號可傳送到输出同步產生方塊 528來允許接收輸入資料Vin,並傳送要同步的輸出資料 Vout〇 預調整伽瑪處理方塊516處理來自時序緩衝器及控制方 塊514之影像資料,以執行圖46之步驟304,其對該输入影 像資料Vin計算該函數,其中在一給定的γ處之函數 值可由一預調整伽瑪表來得到。該影像資料Vin中已經施 加預調整伽瑪,其係儲存在線緩衝器方塊518處的線緩衝 器中。在一範例中,可使用三個線緩衝器來儲存三條線的 输入影像,例如圖55中所示。其它儲存及處理影像資料的 範例係示於圖5 6到6 0。 儲存在線緩衝器方塊518中的影像資料在該3x3資料取 樣方塊519中取樣。此處,包含該中央數值的9個值可在該 次像素呈現處理之暫存器或閂鎖中取樣。係數處理方塊 530執行步驟308,且乘法器+加法器方塊520執行步驟306, 其中每個該9個取樣的數值之g“(x)數值係乘以儲存在係數 -82- 細關 表53 1中的濾波器核心係數值,然號加入該相乘的項次來 得到次像素呈現的输出影像資料V()ut。 後伽瑪處理方塊522對於VQUt執行圖46之步驟310,其中施 加了一顯示器的後伽瑪修正。也就是說,後伽瑪處理方瑰 522係參考一後伽瑪表利用一函數f(x)來計算該顯示器的 f^VJ。输出閂鎖524問鎖來自後伽瑪處理方塊522之資 料,而LVDS輸出526傳送來自输出閂鎖524之輸出影像資料 到TC0N 506。输出同步產生階段528控制在方瑰516、518、 519、520、530之運作的時序,而在522中控制何時該輸出資 料V^t傳送到TC0N 506。 請參考圖52B,TC0N 506包含一輸入閂鎖532來接收來自 LVDS輸出526之输出資料。來自LVDS輸出526之輸出資料可 包含8位元之影像資料的區塊。舉例而言,TCON 506可基 於上述的次像素配置來接收次像素資料。在一範例中, TCON 506可接收8位元行資料,其中奇數列(如RBGRBGRBG) 在偶數列(GBRGBRGBR)之前。該8到6位元混色方瑰534轉換 8位元資料到6位元資料給需要6位元資料格式之顯示器, 其對於許多LCD為標準。因此,在圖52B的範例中,該顯示 器使用此6位元格式。方塊534透過資料匯流排537傳送該输 出資料到該顯示器。TCON 506包含一參考電壓及視訊傳送 (VCOM)電壓方塊536>方瑰536提供來自DC/DC轉換器538之電 壓參考,其係由行驅動器控制539八及列驅動器控制539B使 用來選擇性地開啟在該顯示器的面板內的行及列電晶 體。在一範例中,該顯示器為一平板顯示器,其具有一次 -83- 12薦繼寅 年崧嗝-% 像素的列及行之矩陣,其相對應的電晶體由一列驅動器及 一行驅動器所驅動。該次像素可具有上述的次像素配置。 用於實施伽瑪調整的次像素呈現之圖49的步驟之系統 的範例係示於圖53A及53B。此範例性系統係類似於圖52A 及52B之系統,除了該次像素處理單元500使用至少延遲邏 輯方塊521、局部平均處理方塊540及預伽瑪處理方塊542來 執行該伽瑪調整的次像素呈現,而省略預調整伽瑪處理方 塊516。現在將解釋圖53A之次像素處理單元500之處理方 瑰的運作。 請參考圖53A,PC 501透過DVI 508傳送輸入影像資料Vin(例 如一標準RGB格式的像素資料)到次像素呈現模組5〇4。在 其它範例中,PC 501可傳送一次像素格式的输入影像資料 Vin,如上所述。输入閂鎖及自動偵測方塊512偵測正由DVI 508所接收的影像資料,並閂鎖該像素資料。時序緩衝器 及控制方塊514提供緩衝邏輯來在次像素處理單元500內緩 衝該像素資料。此處,在方瑰514中,時序信號可傳送到 输出同步產生方塊528來允許接收输入資料Vin,並傳送要 同步的输出資料V^。 正緩衝在時序及控制方塊514中的影像資料Vin係儲存在 線緩衝器方塊518的線緩衝器中。線緩衝器方塊518可用相 同於圖52A之方式來儲存影像資料。儲存在線緩衝器方塊 518中的輸入資料係在該3x3資料取樣方塊519中取樣,其可 用相同於圖52A之方式來執行。此處,包含該中央數值的9 個值可在該伽瑪調整的次呈現處理之暫存器或閂鎖中取 -84-Including cathode ray tube (CRT) display device. Please refer to FIG. 52A. The system includes a human computing device (PC) 501 coupled to a sub-pixel rendering module 504 having a primary pixel processing unit 500. The PC 501 may include components of the computing system 750 of FIG. 71. The sub-pixel rendering module 504 of FIG. 52A is coupled to a timing controller (TCON) 506 in FIG. 52B, and is used to control a panel output to a display. Other types of devices available for the PC 501 include a portable computer, a palm computing device, a personal data assistant (PDA), or other similar device with a display. The sub-pixel rendering module 504 can implement the above-mentioned adjusted sub-pixel rendering technology, which has the gamma adjustment technology described in FIG. 46 to output data for sub-pixel rendering. The PC 501 may include a graphics controller or interface card, such as a video graphics card (VGA) to provide image data output to a display. Other types of VGA controllers available include UXGA and XGA controllers. The sub-pixel rendering module 504 may be an independent card or board, which may be set as a field programmable gate array (FPGA), which is programmed to perform the steps described in FIG. 46. In addition, the sub-pixel processing unit 500 may be included in the graphics card controller of the PC 501 as an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) for performing pre-adjusted gamma before sub-pixel rendering. In another example, the sub-pixel rendering module 504 may be an FPGA or ASIC in the TCON 506 of a display panel. Furthermore, the sub-pixel rendering module 504 may be implemented in one or more devices or units connected between the pc 501 and the TCON 506 to output images on a display. The sub-pixel rendering module 504 also includes a digital visual interface (DVI) input 508 and a low voltage differential signaling (LVDS) output 526. The sub-pixel rendering module 504 can receive input image data through the DVI input 508, such as a standard RGB pixel format of I238Wt, and perform pre-adjusted gamma on the image data before sub-pixel rendering. The sub-pixel rendering module 504 can also transmit the data presented by the sub-pixel to the TCON 506 through the LVDS output 526. The LVDS output 526 may be a panel interface of a display device, such as an AMLCD display device. In this way, a display can be coupled to any kind of graphics controller or card using a DVI output. The sub-pixel rendering module 504 also includes an interface 509 connected to the PC 501. The interface 509 may be an I2C interface, which allows the PC 501 to control or download and update the gamma or coefficient table used by the sub-pixel rendering module 504, and stores it in an extended display identification information (EDID) unit 510. Get information. In this way, the gamma and coefficient values can be adjusted to any desired value. Examples of EDID information include basic information about a display and its capabilities, such as maximum image size, color characteristics, preset timing frequency range limits, or other information. The PC 501, for example, can read the information in the EDID unit 510 when it is turned on, to determine the type of display connected to it, and how to transmit image data to the display. The operation of the sub-pixel processing unit 500 operating in the sub-pixel rendering module 504 to implement the steps of FIG. 46 will now be described. For the sake of explanation, the sub-pixel processing unit 500 includes processing blocks 512 to 524, which are implemented in a large FGPA, having any number of logic components or circuits, and a storage device to store a gamma table and / or a coefficient table. Examples of storage devices that store these tables include read-only memory (ROM), random-access memory (RAM), or other similar memory. At the beginning, PC 501 transmits an input image data Vin via DVI 508 (eg -81-ifii3tS ¥… L.— 一 土. „—. ·]] '… 一,'. ·! Pixel data in standard RGB format) Go to the sub-pixel rendering module 504. In other examples, the PC 501 may transmit the input image data Vin in the pixel format once, as described above. The way in which the PC 501 transmits vin may be based on the information in the EDID unit 510. In one example, A graphics controller in the PC 501 transmits red, green, and blue sub-pixel data to the sub-pixel rendering unit 500. The input latch and automatic detection block 512 detects the image data received by the DVI 508 and latches the Pixel data. The timing buffer and control block 514 provides buffer logic to buffer the pixel data in the sub-pixel processing unit 500. Here, in Fang Gui 514, the timing signal can be sent to the output synchronization generation block 528 to allow receiving input data. Vin, and sends the output data Vout to be synchronized. The pre-adjusted gamma processing block 516 processes the image data from the timing buffer and the control block 514 to perform step 304 of FIG. This function is calculated from the image data Vin, where the function value at a given γ can be obtained from a pre-adjusted gamma table. The pre-adjusted gamma has been applied to the image data Vin, which is stored at line buffer block 518 Line buffer. In one example, three line buffers can be used to store the input images of three lines, as shown in Figure 55. Other examples of storing and processing image data are shown in Figures 56 to 60. The image data stored in the online buffer block 518 is sampled in the 3x3 data sampling block 519. Here, the 9 values including the central value can be sampled in the register or latch of the sub-pixel rendering processing. Coefficient processing Block 530 executes step 308, and multiplier + adder block 520 executes step 306, where the value of "g" (x) for each of the 9 sampled values is multiplied by the value stored in the coefficient -82- Close Table 53 1 The core coefficient value of the filter, then the multiplied term is added to obtain the output image data V () ut presented by the sub-pixel. The post-gamma processing block 522 performs step 310 of FIG. 46 on the VQUt, in which a post-gamma correction of a display is applied. That is, the post-gamma processing square rose 522 refers to a post-gamma table and uses a function f (x) to calculate f ^ VJ of the display. The output latch 524 interlocks the data from the post-gamma processing block 522, and the LVDS output 526 transmits the output image data from the output latch 524 to the TCON 506. The output synchronization generation stage 528 controls the timing of operations in the squares 516, 518, 519, 520, and 530, and in 522 controls when the output data V ^ t is transmitted to the TCON 506. Referring to FIG. 52B, the TC0N 506 includes an input latch 532 to receive output data from the LVDS output 526. The output data from the LVDS output 526 may contain blocks of 8-bit image data. For example, TCON 506 can receive sub-pixel data based on the sub-pixel configuration described above. In one example, the TCON 506 can receive 8-bit rows of data, where the odd-numbered columns (such as RGBRBGRBG) precede the even-numbered columns (GBRGBRGBR). The 8 to 6-bit color mixing cube 534 converts 8-bit data to 6-bit data to a display that requires a 6-bit data format, which is standard for many LCDs. Therefore, in the example of Fig. 52B, the display uses this 6-bit format. Block 534 sends the output data to the display via a data bus 537. TCON 506 includes a reference voltage and video transmission (VCOM) voltage block 536> Fang Gui 536 provides a voltage reference from the DC / DC converter 538, which is controlled by the row driver 539 and the column driver control 539B to be selectively turned on. Row and column transistors in a panel of the display. In one example, the display is a flat-panel display having a matrix of rows and rows of -83--12-percent-year pixels, and the corresponding transistors are driven by a column driver and a row driver. The sub-pixel may have the above-mentioned sub-pixel configuration. An example of a system for performing the steps of FIG. 49 for performing sub-pixel rendering of gamma adjustment is shown in FIGS. 53A and 53B. This exemplary system is similar to the system of FIGS. 52A and 52B, except that the sub-pixel processing unit 500 uses at least a delay logic block 521, a local average processing block 540, and a pre-gamma processing block 542 to perform the sub-pixel rendering of the gamma adjustment. , And the pre-adjusted gamma processing block 516 is omitted. The operation of the processing method of the sub-pixel processing unit 500 of Fig. 53A will now be explained. Referring to FIG. 53A, the PC 501 transmits the input image data Vin (such as pixel data of a standard RGB format) to the sub-pixel rendering module 504 through the DVI 508. In other examples, the PC 501 can transmit the input image data Vin in pixel format once, as described above. The input latch and automatic detection block 512 detects the image data being received by the DVI 508 and latches the pixel data. The timing buffer and control block 514 provide buffering logic to buffer the pixel data in the sub-pixel processing unit 500. Here, in the square rose 514, the timing signal may be transmitted to the output synchronization generating block 528 to allow receiving the input data Vin and transmit the output data V ^ to be synchronized. The image data Vin being buffered in the timing and control block 514 is stored in the line buffer of the line buffer block 518. The line buffer block 518 can store image data in the same manner as in Figure 52A. The input data stored in the online buffer block 518 is sampled in the 3x3 data sampling block 519, which can be performed in the same manner as in Fig. 52A. Here, the 9 values containing the central value can be taken from the register or latch of the sub-rendering process of the gamma adjustment. -84-

樣。接著,圖49的局部平均處理方瑰540執行步驟354,其 中該局部平均(α)係利用每個邊緣項次的中央項次來計 算。 基於該局部平均,預伽瑪處理方塊542執行圖49之步驟 356,用於一,,預伽瑪」修正,做為計算β'οΟΉ,其係使 用一預伽瑪查找表(LUT)。該LUT可包含在此方瑰內,或在 次像素呈現模組504中存取。延遲邏輯方塊521可延遲提供 Vin到乘法器+加法器方塊520,直到完成局部平均及預伽瑪 計算。係數處理方塊530及乘法器+加法器方塊520使用係數 表 531執行步驟 358、360、362、364、366、368及 370,如圖 49 中所述。特定言之,來自步驟358之CKg、o〇的數值,以及 來自步驟364之CK“GA”的數值,其使用例如圖49中所述的第 二計算(2),其乘以一相對應的項次Vin(步驟366及368)。方 塊520計算所有相乘的項次之總和即被計算(步驟370>來產 生輸出次像素呈現的資料V。^ 後伽瑪處理方塊522及輸出閂鎖524以相同於圖52A之方 法來執行,以傳送輸出影像資料到TCON 506。圖53A中的输 出同步產生階段528控制了在方塊518、519、521、520、530 中執行運算的時序,及在522中控制該输出資料何時傳送 到TCON 506來顯示。圖53B之TCON 506以相同於圖52B之方法 來運作,除了係使用圖49之方法所得到的输出資料。 用於實施圖51之具有一歐米茄函數的伽瑪調整的次像 素呈現之步驟的系統之範例係示於圖54A及54B。此範例 性系統係類似於圖53A及53B之系統,除了該次像素處理 -85 - E! 月 單元500使用至少歐米茄處理方瑰544及預伽瑪(具有歐米 茄)處理方塊545來執行該具有歐米茄函數的伽瑪調整的 次像素呈現。現在將解釋圖54A之次像素處理單元500之處 理方瑰的運作。 請參考圖54A,處理方塊512、514、518及519係以相同於圖 53A之處理方塊的相同方式來運作。歐米茄函數處理方塊 544執行圖51之步驟404,其中該歐米茄函數w(x)=x1/0)係應用 到來自該3x3資料取樣方塊519之输入影像資料。局部平均 處理方塊540執行步驟406,其中利用每個邊緣項次的中央 項次來計算該歐米茄修正的局部平均(β)。預伽瑪(具有歐 米茄)處理方塊545執行步驟408,其中來自該局部平均處理 方塊540之输出接受計算g·1#1 ,其係實施為 8-1(νΛβ)Μβω)γ“,以使用具有歐米茄LUT之預伽瑪之,,具有 歐米茄之預伽瑪」之修正。 圖54Α的處理方塊520、521、530、522及524係以相同於圖53Α 之方式來運作,除了每個邊緣項次的具有歐米茄之預伽瑪 修正的結果乘以一相對應的係數項次CK。圖54Α的輸出同 步產生方塊528控制方塊518、519、521、520、530中執行運作 的時序,及522來控制該输出資料何時傳送到TCON 506來顯 示。圖54B之TCON 506以相同於圖53B之方法來運作,除了 係使用圖5 1之方法所得到的輸出資料。 其可對以上圖52Α·52Β、53A-53B及54A-54B之範例進行其它 的變化。舉例而言,以上範例的組件可實施在一單一模組 上,並選擇性地控制來決定要執行那一種處理。舉例而 -86-kind. Next, the local average processing square 540 of FIG. 49 performs step 354, where the local average (α) is calculated using the central term of each edge term. Based on the local averaging, the pre-gamma processing block 542 executes step 356 of FIG. 49 for the one, pre-gamma correction, and calculates β′οΟΉ, which uses a pre-gamma lookup table (LUT). The LUT can be included in this square or accessed in the sub-pixel rendering module 504. The delay logic block 521 may delay supplying Vin to the multiplier + adder block 520 until the local averaging and pre-gamma calculations are completed. Coefficient processing block 530 and multiplier + adder block 520 use coefficient table 531 to perform steps 358, 360, 362, 364, 366, 368, and 370, as described in FIG. 49. In particular, the values of CKg, o0 from step 358, and the values of CK "GA" from step 364 use, for example, the second calculation (2) described in FIG. 49, which is multiplied by a corresponding Item Vin (steps 366 and 368). Block 520 calculates the sum of all multiplied terms (step 370 > to generate the data V represented by the output sub-pixels.) The post-gamma processing block 522 and the output latch 524 are performed in the same way as in FIG. 52A. The output image data is transmitted to TCON 506. The output synchronization generation stage 528 in FIG. 53A controls the timing of performing operations in blocks 518, 519, 521, 520, 530, and in 522 controls when the output data is transmitted to TCON 506. The TCON 506 in FIG. 53B operates in the same way as in FIG. 52B, except that the output data obtained by using the method in FIG. 49 is used. The sub-pixel rendering for implementing the gamma adjustment with an omega function of FIG. An example of a step system is shown in Figs. 54A and 54B. This exemplary system is similar to the system of Figs. 53A and 53B, except that the sub-pixel processing -85-E! (With Omega) processing block 545 to perform the gamma-adjusted sub-pixel rendering with the Omega function. The operation of the processing cube of the sub-pixel processing unit 500 of FIG. 54A will now be explained Referring to FIG. 54A, processing blocks 512, 514, 518, and 519 operate in the same manner as the processing block of FIG. 53A. The omega function processing block 544 performs step 404 of FIG. 51, where the omega function w (x) = x1 / 0) is applied to the input image data from the 3x3 data sampling block 519. The local averaging processing block 540 executes step 406, where the central term of each edge term is used to calculate the omega-corrected local mean (β). The pre-gamma (with Omega) processing block 545 executes step 408, where the output from the local average processing block 540 accepts the calculation g · 1 # 1, which is implemented as 8-1 (νΛβ) Μβω) γ "to use The pre-gamma of the Omega LUT has the "pre-gamma" correction. The processing blocks 520, 521, 530, 522, and 524 of FIG. 54A operate in the same manner as in FIG. 53A, except that the result of pre-gamma correction with omega is multiplied by a corresponding coefficient term for each edge term. CK. The output synchronizing block 528 of Fig. 54A controls the timing of execution operations in blocks 518, 519, 521, 520, and 530, and 522 controls when the output data is transmitted to TCON 506 for display. TCON 506 in FIG. 54B operates in the same manner as in FIG. 53B, except that the output data obtained by using the method in FIG. 51 is used. It is possible to make other changes to the examples of Figs. 52A, 52B, 53A-53B and 54A-54B above. For example, the components of the above example can be implemented on a single module and selectively controlled to decide which type of processing to perform. For example, -86-

糊#Q4KPaste # Q4K

言,這種模組可設置一開關,或設置來接收命令或指令, 以選擇性地運作圖46、49及51之方法。 圖55到60所示為範例性電路,其可由圖52A、5 3 A及54 A 所示的範例性系統中的處理方瑰來使用。上述的次像素呈 現方法需要許多的計算,其包含將係數濾波器數值乘以像 素值,其中加入許多相乘的項次。以下的具體實施例揭示 一種電路來有效率地執行這種計算。 請參考圖55,所示為該線緩衝器方瑰518的電路,3x3資 料取樣方塊519、係數處理方塊530,及乘法器+加法器方塊 520之電路範例(如圖52A、53A及54A)。此範例性電路可執 行上述的次像素呈現功能。 在此例中,線緩衝器方瑰518包含線緩衝器554、556及 558,其係結合在一起來儲存輸入資料(Vin)。输入資料或像 素可儲存在這些線緩衝器中,其允許在3x3資料取樣方塊 519中於閂鎖。到L9取樣9個像素值。藉由在閂鎖1^到L9中儲 存9個像素值,在一單一時脈循環中可處理9個像素值。舉 例而言,該9個乘法器叫到M9可將在該。到L9閂鎖中的像 素值乘以在係數表531中的適當的係數值(濾波器值),以實 施上述的次像素呈現功能。在另一種實施中,該乘法器可 用一唯讀記憶體(ROM)取代,而該像素值及係數濾波器值 可用來產生一位址來取得該相乘的項次。如圖5 5所示,多 個乘法可用一有效率的方式來執行並相加,以執行次像素 呈現功能。 圖56所示為使用兩個加總緩衝器之線緩衝器方瑰518、 I238QI h B. 3x3資料取樣方塊519、係數處理方瑰530及乘法器+加法器 方塊520,用以執行次像素呈現功能。 如圖56所示,三個閂鎖1^到L3儲存像素值,其係輸入到9 個乘法器吣到M9。乘法器吣到M3乘以來自問鎖1^到L3之像 素值與係數表531中的適當係數值,並饋入該結果到加法 器564,其計算該結果的總和,並儲存該總和在總和緩衝 器560中。乘法器厘4到M6乘以來自問鎖。到L6之像素值與係 數表531中的適當係數值,並饋入該結果到加法器566,其 計算來自%到M6乘以該總和緩衝器560之输出的總和,並 儲存該總和在總和緩衝器562中。乘法器%到]^9乘以來自 閂鎖卜到L9之像素值與係數表531中的適當係數值,並饋入 該結果到加法器568,其計算來自厘9乘以該總和緩衝 器562之输出的總和,以計算該输出值V^t。 圖56的此範例使用兩個部份總和緩衝器560及562,其可 儲存16位元數值。藉由使用兩個總和緩衝器,圖56的此範 例可提供該三個線緩衝器樣本的改進,使得其使用較少的 緩衝器記憶體。 圖57所示為一電路的範例,其可由圖52A、53A及54A之處 理方塊使用,以實施關於紅色及綠色像素之次像素呈現功 能。明確地說,此範例可在關於紅色及綠色像素之次像素 呈現期間用於該1:1P:S比例解析度。該1:1的情況提供了 簡單的次像素呈現計算。在此範例中,包含在該濾波器核 心中的所有數值為0、1或2的次方,如上所示,其可降低 所需要的乘法器數目,如下所述。 -88 -In other words, this module can be provided with a switch, or it can be set to receive commands or instructions to selectively operate the methods of FIGS. 46, 49, and 51. Figures 55 to 60 show exemplary circuits that can be used by processing cells in the exemplary systems shown in Figures 52A, 5 3 A, and 54 A. The above-mentioned sub-pixel rendering method requires a lot of calculations, which involves multiplying the coefficient filter value by the pixel value, and adding many multiplication terms. The following specific examples disclose a circuit to efficiently perform such calculations. Please refer to Fig. 55, which shows the circuit examples of the line buffer square 518, the 3x3 data sampling block 519, the coefficient processing block 530, and the multiplier + adder block 520 (see Figs. 52A, 53A, and 54A). This exemplary circuit can perform the sub-pixel rendering function described above. In this example, the line buffer square frame 518 includes line buffers 554, 556, and 558, which are combined to store the input data (Vin). Input data or pixels can be stored in these line buffers, which allows latching in the 3x3 data sampling block 519. Go to L9 and sample 9 pixel values. By storing 9 pixel values in latches 1 ^ to L9, 9 pixel values can be processed in a single clock cycle. For example, the 9 multipliers called M9 can be there. The pixel value in the L9 latch is multiplied by the appropriate coefficient value (filter value) in the coefficient table 531 to implement the sub-pixel rendering function described above. In another implementation, the multiplier may be replaced with a read-only memory (ROM), and the pixel value and coefficient filter value may be used to generate a bit address to obtain the multiplied term. As shown in Figure 5, multiple multiplications can be performed and added in an efficient manner to perform the sub-pixel rendering function. Figure 56 shows the line buffers Fang 518, I238QI h B. 3x3 data sampling block 519, coefficient processing Fang 530, and multiplier + adder block 520 using two summing buffers to perform sub-pixel rendering. Features. As shown in Figure 56, three latches 1 ^ to L3 store pixel values, which are input to 9 multipliers 吣 to M9. Multipliers 吣 to M3 are multiplied by the pixel values from the lock 1 ^ to L3 and the appropriate coefficient values in the coefficient table 531, and the result is fed to the adder 564, which calculates the sum of the results and stores the sum in the sum buffer器 560。 In the device 560. The multiplier is multiplied by 4 to M6 by the interlock. To the pixel value of L6 and the appropriate coefficient value in the coefficient table 531, and feed the result to the adder 566, which calculates the sum of the output from% to M6 multiplied by the sum buffer 560, and stores the sum in the sum buffer器 中 562。 In 562. Multiplier% to] ^ 9 times the pixel value from the latch to L9 and the appropriate coefficient value in the coefficient table 531, and feeds the result to the adder 568, which calculates from the centimeter 9 times the sum buffer 562 The sum of the outputs is used to calculate the output value V ^ t. This example of FIG. 56 uses two partial sum buffers 560 and 562, which can store 16-bit values. By using two sum buffers, this example of FIG. 56 can provide an improvement on the three line buffer samples so that it uses less buffer memory. Figure 57 shows an example of a circuit that can be used by the processing blocks of Figures 52A, 53A, and 54A to implement sub-pixel rendering functions for red and green pixels. Specifically, this example can be used for this 1: 1P: S ratio resolution during sub-pixel rendering of red and green pixels. This 1: 1 case provides simple sub-pixel rendering calculations. In this example, all values contained in the core of the filter are powers of 0, 1, or 2, as shown above, which reduces the number of multipliers required, as described below. -88-

0 1 0 1 4 1 0 1 00 1 0 1 4 1 0 1 0

請參考圖57,所示為9個像素延遲暫存器&到119來儲存像 素值。暫存器心到R3饋入到線緩衝器1(570),及該線緩衝器 1(570)之輸出饋入到暫存器尺4。暫存器R4到R7饋入到線緩衝 器2(572>。該線緩衝器2(572)的输出饋入到暫存器R7,其饋 入到暫存器118及R9。加法器575加入來自尺2及R4之數值。加 法器576加入來自心及R8之數值。加法器578加入來自加法 器575及576之输出的數值。加法器579加入來自加法器578 之输出的數值,及該桶偏移器573之输出,其執行將來自 R5的數值乘以4。該加法器579的輸出饋入到一桶偏移器 574,其執行一除以8。Please refer to FIG. 57, which shows 9 pixel delay registers & to 119 to store pixel values. The register core to R3 is fed to the line buffer 1 (570), and the output of the line buffer 1 (570) is fed to the register ruler 4. Registers R4 to R7 are fed to line buffer 2 (572>. The output of line buffer 2 (572) is fed to register R7, which is fed to registers 118 and R9. Adder 575 is added Values from ruler 2 and R4. Adder 576 adds values from heart and R8. Adder 578 adds values from adders 575 and 576. Adder 579 adds values from adder 578 and the bucket. The output of the offsetter 573, its execution multiplies the value from R5 by 4. The output of this adder 579 is fed to a bucket offsetter 574, which performs a division by 8.

因為該1 : 1濾波器核心在4個位置中為零(如上所示),其 對於次像素呈現不需要4個像素延遲暫存器,因為該數值4 為1,使得其被加入,而不需要乘法,如圖57所示。 圖5 8所示為一電路的範例,其可由圖5 2 A、5 3 A及5 4 A之 處理方塊使用,用以在藍色像素的1 : 1 P : S比例的情況中實 施次像素呈現。對於藍色像素,僅需要2x2濾波器核心, 藉此允許必要的電路更為複雜。 請參考圖58,所示為9個像素延遲暫存器心到心來接收輸 入像素值。暫存器&到尺3輸入到線緩衝器1(580),而該線緩 -89- 1238011; 衝器1(580)的输出饋入到暫存器R4。暫存器化4到以7饋入到線 緩衝器2(582)。該線緩衝器2(582)的输出饋入到暫存器R7, 其饋入到暫存器118及R9。加法器581加入數值在暫存器R4、 R5、化7及尺8中。該加法器的输出饋入到一桶偏移器575,其 執行一除以4。因為該藍色像素僅包含在四個暫存器中的 數值,且那些數值偏移通過該像素延遲暫存器&到R9,並 出現在四個不同的紅色/綠色輸出像素時脈循環,該藍色 像素計算可在該處理中的早期來執行。 圖59所示為一電路的範例,其可由圖52A、53 A及54A之處 理方塊使用,以實施關於使用兩個總和緩衝器之紅色及綠 色像素之1:1P:S比例的次像素呈現功能。藉由使用總和緩 衝器,其可簡化必要的電路。請參考圖5 9,所示為3個像 素延遲暫存器&到R3來接收输入像素值。暫存器&饋入到 加法器591。暫存器R2饋入到總和緩衝器1(583)、桶偏移器 590,及加法器592。暫存器R3饋入到加法器591。該總和緩 衝器1(5 83 )的输出饋入到加法器591。加法器591加入來自 暫存器Ri、R3之數值,而來自桶偏移器590之R2的數值乘以 2。該加法器591之输出饋入到總和緩衝器2(584),其傳送其 输出到加法器592,其加上此數值與心中的數值來產生該 輸出。 圖60所示為一電路的範例,其可由圖52A、53A及54A之處 理方塊使用,以實施關於使用一個總和緩衝器之1:1P:S比 例的次像素呈現功能。藉由使用一總和緩衝器,該必要的 電路可對藍色像素進一步簡化。請參考圖60,所不為2個 -90- mfn ~ . ~ r、’日丨 像素延遲暫存器心到r2來接收輸入像素值。暫存器&及r2 饋入到加法器593及594。加法器593加入來自1^及R2的數 值,並儲存該输出在總和緩衝器1(585>該總和緩衝器1(585) 之输出饋入到加法器594。加法器594加入來自Rp R2的數 值,及總和緩衝器1(585)來產生該输出。 圖6 1所示為一方法600的流程圖,用以在上述的次像素 呈現處理期間來計時一顯示器的邊緣處的黑色像素。上述 的次像素呈現計算需要一 3x3之濾波器數值的3x3矩陣來 施加到一像素值的矩陣。但是,對於在該顯示器之邊緣處 具有一像素之影像,周圍的像素不會存在於該邊緣像素之 周圍,以提供該像素值的3x3矩陣之數值。以下的方法可 處理決定邊緣像素的周圍像素值之問題。以下的方法假設 在該顯示器的邊緣處一影像的所有像素為黑色,其具有一 零的像素值。該方法可由圖52A、53A及54A之輸入閂鎖及 自動偵測方塊512、時序緩衝器及控制方塊514,及線緩衝 器方塊518來寅施。 初始時,線緩衝器在一垂直折返期間,在計時於第一掃 描之前對於一黑色像素初始化為零丨步驟602>該第一掃描 線可儲存在一線緩衝器中。接著,一掃描線在當該第二掃 描線在計時中即输出丨步驟604>此可在當對於該第一掃描 線之計算完成時即會發生,其包來自,,上方之外」的黑色 像素之一條掃描線。然後,一額外的零在每條掃描線中(步 驟606)計時在第一像素中之前來對一丨黑色)像素來計時。 接著,像素可在當第二實際像素在計時中即输出(步驟 -91 - 1_丽1] 608>。此可在當完成第一像素之計算時來發生。 一丨黑色)像素的另一個零在一掃描線上的最後實際像 素已經計時之後即被計時(步驟610)。對於此方法,線緩衝 器或總和緩衝器,如上所述,可設置來儲存兩個額外的像 素值來儲存該黑色像素,如上所述。該兩個黑色像素可在 該水平折回期間被計時。然後,在該最後的掃描線已經計 時之後,對於來自以上步驟之所有的零(黑色)像素來計時 多一條的掃描線。當己經完成計算該最後的掃瞄時,即可 使用該輸出。這些步驟可在垂直折回期間即完成。 因此,以上的方法可在次像素呈現期間,提供關於邊緣 像素的像素值之3x3矩陣的像素值。 圖62到66所示為系統之範例性方瑰圖,以改進在一顯示 器上影像的彩色解析度。目前影像系統在增加彩色解析度 上的限制係詳細揭示於美國臨時專利申請編號 60/311,138,其名為,,改進的伽瑪表」,其於2001年8月8日立 案。簡言之,增加彩色解析度較昂貴,並很難來賣施。也 就是說,例如執行一濾波處理,加權的總和即除以一固定 值,以使得該濾波器結果的整髖效應等於1。該除法計算 的除數(如上所述)可為一 2的次方,使得該除法運算可由 向右偏移,或僅由丟棄最低有效位元來完成。對於這種處 理,該最低有效位元通常被丟棄、偏移,或除掉,其並未 使用。但是這些位元可用來增加彩色解析度,如下所述。 請參考圖62,一系統的範例性方瑰圖係顯示來執行次像 素呈現,其使用寬的數位到類比轉換器或LVDS,其改進彩 -92- --— . 〜-i.-m.·*.-. '_,-.,...T',xr 色解析度。在此範例中,其並未提供伽瑪修正,而該次像 素呈現功能產生1 1 _位元的結果。VGA記憶體613儲存影像 資料在一 8位元格式。次像素呈現方瑰自VGA記憶體613接 收影像資料,並對該影像執行次像素呈現功能(如上所 述),以提供1 1位元格式的結果。在一範例中,次像素呈 現方塊614可代表圖52A、53A及54A之次呈現處理模組504 次像素呈現方塊614可在次像素呈現期間自該除法運算 傳送額外的位元,來由一寬DAC或LVDS输出615來處理,如 果設置來處理11位元的資料。該输入資料可維持在該8位 元資料格式,其允許既有的影像、軟體及驅動程式維持不 變,以得到增加彩色品質的好處。顯示器616可設置來接 收11位元格式的影像資料,以提供相反地額外彩色資訊成 為8位元格式的影像資料。 請參考圖63,所示為一系統的範例性方塊圖,其提供使 用一寬伽瑪表或查找表(LUT)之次像素呈現,其具有多進 輸入(11位元)及少出输出(8位元)。VGA記憶體617以8位元 格式儲存影像資料。次像素呈現方塊618接收來自VGA記憶 髏617之影像資料,並對該影像資料執行次像素呈現功能 (如上述),其中使用來自寬伽瑪表619的伽瑪值來應用伽瑪 修正。伽瑪表619可具有一 11位元的输入及一 8位元的输 出。在一範例中,次像素處理方塊618可與圖62的方塊614 相同。 方塊618可使用來自伽瑪表619的丨丨位元寬的伽瑪LUT來 執行上述的次像素呈現功能,以應用伽瑪調整。該額外的 -93- f I238MM: 位元可儲存在該寬伽瑪LUT中,其可具有高於256的額外登 錄。該方塊619的伽瑪LUT可具有該CRTDAC或LVDS LCD方塊 620的一 8位元输出,以在顯示器621顯示一 8位元格式的顯 示資料。藉由使用該寬伽瑪LUT,可避免略過输出值。 請參考圖64,所示為一系統的範例性方瑰圖,其提供使 用一寬输入寬輸出伽瑪表或查找表(LUT)之次像素呈現, VGA記憶體以8位元格式儲存影像資料。次像素呈現方塊 624接收來自VGA記憶體623之影像,並對該影像資料執行 次像素呈現功能(如上述),其中使用來自伽瑪表626的伽瑪 值來應用伽瑪修正。伽瑪表626可具有一 11位元的输入及 一 14位元的輸出。在一範例中,次像素處理方瑰624可與 圖63的方塊618相同。 方塊624可使用來自具有一 14位元输出的伽瑪表619之1 1 位元寬的伽瑪LUT來執行上述的次像素呈現功能,以應用 伽瑪調整。在方塊627之一寬DAC或LVDS可接收1 4位元格式 的输出,以在顯示器628上輸出資料,其可設置來接收一 14位元格式的資料。方塊626的寬伽瑪LUT可具有比原始輸 入資料更多的輸出位元(即一少進多出,或FIMO LUT)。在 此例中,藉由使用這種LUT,可比來源影像所提供者可具 有更多的輸出彩色。 請參考圖65,所示為一系統的範例性方塊圖,其使用與 圖64中相同種類的伽瑪表,及一空間·時間混色方塊來提 供次像素呈現。VGA記憶體629以8位元格式儲存影像資 料。次像素呈現方塊630接收來自VGA記憶體629之影像, -94-Because the 1: 1 filter core is zero in 4 positions (as shown above), it does not require a 4 pixel delay register for sub-pixel rendering, because the value of 4 is 1, which makes it added instead of Multiplication is required, as shown in Figure 57. Figure 5 8 shows an example of a circuit that can be used by the processing blocks of Figures 5 2 A, 5 3 A, and 5 4 A to implement sub-pixels in the case of a 1: 1 P: S ratio of blue pixels. Render. For blue pixels, only a 2x2 filter core is required, thereby allowing the necessary circuitry to be more complex. Please refer to Figure 58, which shows the 9-pixel delay register to receive the input pixel value. Register & to ruler 3 is input to line buffer 1 (580), and the line is buffered -89-1238011; the output of punch 1 (580) is fed to register R4. Registers 4 to 7 are fed to line buffer 2 (582). The output of this line buffer 2 (582) is fed to the register R7, which is fed to the registers 118 and R9. The adder 581 adds the values to the registers R4, R5, H7 and H8. The output of this adder is fed to a barrel offsetter 575, which performs a division by four. Because the blue pixel contains only the values in the four registers, and those values are shifted through the pixel delay register & to R9, and appear in the four different red / green output pixel clock cycles, The blue pixel calculation may be performed early in the process. Figure 59 shows an example of a circuit that can be used by the processing blocks of Figures 52A, 53 A, and 54A to implement a subpixel rendering function of a 1: 1P: S ratio of red and green pixels using two sum buffers. . By using a summation buffer, it simplifies the necessary circuits. Please refer to Figure 5-9, which shows three pixel delay registers & to R3 to receive input pixel values. The register & is fed to the adder 591. Register R2 is fed to sum buffer 1 (583), bucket offsetter 590, and adder 592. The register R3 is fed to the adder 591. The output of this sum buffer 1 (5 83) is fed to an adder 591. The adder 591 adds the values from the registers Ri and R3, and the value of R2 from the bucket offsetter 590 is multiplied by two. The output of the adder 591 is fed to the sum buffer 2 (584), which sends its output to the adder 592, which adds this value and the value in the heart to produce the output. Figure 60 shows an example of a circuit that can be used by the processing blocks of Figures 52A, 53A, and 54A to implement a sub-pixel rendering function with a 1: 1P: S ratio using a sum buffer. By using a sum buffer, this necessary circuit can further simplify the blue pixels. Please refer to FIG. 60, there are not two -90- mfn ~. ~ R, ‘day 丨 pixel delay registers to r2 to receive input pixel values. Registers & and r2 are fed to adders 593 and 594. The adder 593 adds the values from 1 ^ and R2, and stores the output in the sum buffer 1 (585). The output of the sum buffer 1 (585) is fed to the adder 594. The adder 594 adds the value from Rp R2 And sum buffer 1 (585) to generate the output. Figure 61 shows a flowchart of a method 600 for timing black pixels at the edges of a display during the sub-pixel rendering process described above. The above Subpixel rendering calculations require a 3x3 matrix of 3x3 filter values to be applied to a matrix of one pixel value. However, for an image with one pixel at the edge of the display, surrounding pixels will not exist around the edge pixels To provide a 3x3 matrix value of the pixel value. The following method can deal with the problem of determining the surrounding pixel value of the edge pixel. The following method assumes that all pixels of an image at the edge of the display are black and have a zero Pixel value. This method can be implemented by the input latch and automatic detection block 512, the timing buffer and control block 514, and the line buffer block 518 of FIGS. 52A, 53A, and 54A. Initially, a line buffer is initialized to zero for a black pixel before timing the first scan during a vertical turn-back period. Step 602 > The first scan line can be stored in a line buffer. Then, a scan line is The second scan line is output during timing. Step 604> This can occur when the calculation for the first scan line is completed, and its package comes from one of the black pixels. An extra zero is counted in each scan line (step 606) before a first black pixel is timed. Then, the pixel can be output when the second actual pixel is in timing (step-91-1_Li 1] 608>. This can occur when the calculation of the first pixel is completed. One black one of the pixels Zero is counted after the last actual pixel on a scan line has been timed (step 610). For this method, a line buffer or a sum buffer, as described above, can be set to store two additional pixel values to store the black pixel, as described above. The two black pixels can be timed during the horizontal retrace. Then, after the last scan line has been counted, one more scan line is counted for all zero (black) pixels from the above steps. This output can be used when the last scan has been calculated. These steps can be completed during the vertical rewind. Therefore, the above method can provide pixel values of a 3x3 matrix of pixel values of edge pixels during sub-pixel rendering. Figures 62 to 66 show exemplary square rosettes of the system to improve the color resolution of the image on a display. The limitations of current imaging systems in increasing color resolution are disclosed in detail in U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60 / 311,138, entitled, "Improved Gamma Table," which was filed on August 8, 2001. In short, adding color resolution is expensive and difficult to sell. That is, for example, if a filtering process is performed, the weighted sum is divided by a fixed value so that the hip effect of the filter result is equal to one. The division calculated by the division (as described above) can be a power of one, so that the division operation can be shifted to the right, or only by discarding the least significant bit. For this processing, the least significant bit is usually discarded, shifted, or removed, and it is not used. But these bits can be used to increase color resolution, as described below. Please refer to FIG. 62, an exemplary square rosette display of a system to perform sub-pixel rendering, which uses a wide digital-to-analog converter or LVDS, which improves color-92- ---. ~ -I.-m. * .-. '_,-., ... T', xr color resolution. In this example, it does not provide gamma correction, and the sub-pixel rendering function produces a 1 1 _ bit result. VGA memory 613 stores image data in an 8-bit format. The sub-pixel rendering square receives image data from the VGA memory 613 and performs a sub-pixel rendering function on the image (as described above) to provide results in a 11-bit format. In one example, the sub-pixel rendering block 614 may represent the sub-presentation processing module 504 of FIGS. 52A, 53A, and 54A. The sub-pixel rendering block 614 may transmit extra bits from the division operation during the sub-pixel rendering to make a wide DAC or LVDS output 615 to process, if set to process 11-bit data. The input data can be maintained in the 8-bit data format, which allows existing images, software, and drivers to remain unchanged for the benefit of increased color quality. The display 616 may be configured to receive image data in an 11-bit format to provide additional color information to the image data in an 8-bit format instead. Please refer to FIG. 63, which is an exemplary block diagram of a system that provides sub-pixel rendering using a wide gamma table or look-up table (LUT) with multiple inputs (11 bits) and fewer outputs ( 8-bit). VGA memory 617 stores image data in 8-bit format. The sub-pixel rendering block 618 receives the image data from the VGA memory 617 and performs a sub-pixel rendering function on the image data (as described above), wherein the gamma value from the wide gamma table 619 is used to apply the gamma correction. The gamma table 619 may have an 11-bit input and an 8-bit output. In one example, sub-pixel processing block 618 may be the same as block 614 of FIG. 62. Block 618 may use the bit-wide gamma LUT from the gamma table 619 to perform the sub-pixel rendering function described above to apply gamma adjustment. The additional -93-f I238MM: bits can be stored in the wide gamma LUT, which can have additional registrations above 256. The gamma LUT of the block 619 may have an 8-bit output of the CRTDAC or LVDS LCD block 620 to display display data in an 8-bit format on the display 621. By using this wide gamma LUT, the output value can be avoided. Please refer to FIG. 64, which shows an exemplary square diagram of a system that provides sub-pixel rendering using a wide input wide output gamma table or look-up table (LUT). VGA memory stores image data in 8-bit format . The sub-pixel rendering block 624 receives the image from the VGA memory 623 and performs a sub-pixel rendering function (as described above) on the image data, wherein the gamma value from the gamma table 626 is used to apply the gamma correction. The gamma table 626 may have an 11-bit input and a 14-bit output. In one example, the sub-pixel processing square 624 may be the same as block 618 of FIG. 63. Block 624 may use a 1-bit-wide gamma LUT from a gamma table 619 with a 14-bit output to perform the sub-pixel rendering function described above to apply gamma adjustment. At block 627, a one-width DAC or LVDS can receive the output in 14-bit format to output data on display 628, which can be set to receive data in 14-bit format. The wide gamma LUT of block 626 may have more output bits (i.e., one less in and more out, or FIMO LUT) than the original input data. In this example, by using this LUT, you can have more output colors than the source image provider. Please refer to FIG. 65, which shows an exemplary block diagram of a system that uses the same kind of gamma table as in FIG. 64, and a space-time color mixing block to provide sub-pixel rendering. VGA memory 629 stores image data in 8-bit format. The sub-pixel rendering block 630 receives the image from the VGA memory 629, -94-

並對該影像資料執行次像素呈現功能(如上述),其中使用 來自伽瑪表631的伽瑪值來應用伽瑪修正。伽瑪表631可具 有一 11位元的输入及一14位元的输出。在一範例中,次像 素處理方塊640可與圖64的方塊624相同。 方瑰630可使用來自具有一 14位元输出的伽瑪表631之11 位元寬的伽瑪LUT來執行上述的次像素呈現功能,以應用 伽瑪調整。該空間-時間混色方塊632接收14位元的資料, 並输出8位元資料到一 LCD顯示器634之8位元CDLVDS。因 此,可使用既有的LVDS驅動器及LCD顯示器,而不需要昂 貴地重新設計LVDS驅動器、時序控制器或LCD面板,其可 提供比圖63之範例性系統要更佳的好處。 請參考圖66,其顯示一系統的範例性方塊圖,其使用一 預補償查找表(LUT)來補償輸出顯示器的非線性伽瑪反應 來提供次像素呈現,以改進影像品質。VGA記憶髏635以8 位元格式儲存影像資料。預補償查找表方塊636可儲存數 值在一倒轉伽瑪修正表中,其可補償在VGA記憶體635中該 影像資料上的該輸出顯示之伽瑪反應曲線。在該修正表中 的伽瑪值可提供26位元數值來提供一伽瑪值等於例如3.3 之必要的伽瑪修正值。次像素呈現處理方塊637可使用表 636中的伽瑪值來提供上述的預補償。 依此方式,該範例性系統係在與該输出顯示之相同的” 彩色空間」中應用次像素呈現,而並非在該VGA記憶體635 所儲存的輸入影像之彩色空間中。次像素處理方塊637可 傳送處理的資料到一伽瑪输出產生方塊638,以執行上述 ----------------------------------------- 123801 to 的後伽瑪修正。此方瑰可接收29位元的輸入資料及輸出14 位元資料。空間-時間混色方塊639可轉換自一8位元LVDS 方瑰640之伽瑪輸出產生方瑰638所接收的資料,來在,顯$ 器641上輸出一影像。 圖6 7到6 9所示為一函數評估器的範例性具體實施例,其 執行數學計算,例如在高速下產生伽瑪输出值。以下的具 體實施例可自大量的输入值來產生小量的伽瑪输出值。該 計算可使用單調增加的函數,例如像是平方根、幂曲線及 三角函數。此特別有用於產生伽瑪修正曲線。 以下的具體實施例可使用一二進制搜尋運作,其具有使 用一小參數表之多重階段。舉例而言,該二進制搜尋的每 個階段可造成在該輸出值中多一位元的精度。依此方式, 在一 8位元輸出伽瑪修正函數中可使用8個階段。該階段的 數目可根據該伽瑪修正函數的資料格式尺寸而定。每個階 段可對一不同的输入值平行地完成,藉此以下的具體實施 例可使用一序列管路來在每個時脈循環上接收一新的輸 入值。 此函數評估器的階段示於圖69及70。圖6 7所示為該函數 評估器的一階段的內部組件。每個階段可具有一類似的結 構。請參考圖67,該階段接收三個輸入值,其包含一 8位 元输入值,一 4位元近似值,及一時脈信號。該8位元輸入 值饋入到一比較器656及一输入閂鎖652>該4位元近似值饋 入到該近似閂鎖658。該時脈信號係耦合到比較器2 1、输 入閂鎖652、一單一位元結果閂鎖660、近似閂鎖658,及參 -96- f ia^(M κ - _ —立—.月曰丨 數記憶體654。參數記憶體可包含一 rAM或R〇M,並來儲存 參數值,例如圖68所示的參數值。這些參數值對應於sqrt(x) 之函數,做為範例的用途。該8位元输入及4位元近似值為 範例性,並可具有其它的位元格式。舉例而言,該输入可 為一24位元數值,而該近似值可為一 8位元值。 現在將解釋該階段的運作。在該時脈信號的上升邊緣, 該近似值係用來查找在一參數記憶體654中的該參數值之 一。來自該參數記憶體654之输出係由比較器656來與該8 位元輸入值比較,並來產生饋入到結果閂鎖660中的結果 位元。在一範例中,該結果位元為1,如果該输入值大於 或等於該參數值,而如果該输入值小於該參數值,即為〇。 在該時脈信號的尾緣上,該输入值、結果位元及近似值係 分別閂鎖到閂鎖652、660、658,以對於下一階段保持該數 值。請參考圖68,一參數表,其可儲存在參數記憶體654 到計算該8位元值的平方根之函數。該函數可用於任何種 類的伽瑪修正函數,而所得到的數值可以進位。 圖69所示為四個階段(階段1到階段4>之一具體賁施例 來實施一函數評估器。每個這些階段可包含圖67之相同的 組件,並可為相同的構造。舉例而言,每個階段可包含儲 存圖8之表格的參數記憶體,使得該階段管路將實施一平 方根函數。現在將解釋該函數評估器的運作。一 8位元输 入數值即提供給階段1,因為數值由階段1流到階段4,及 最後到該输出,其具有連續的時脈循環。也就是說,對於 每個時脈,每個8位元值的平方根即經過計算,而在階段4 之後提供输出。 在一範例中,階段1可將近似值初始化為1,000(二進 制),而階段1的結果位元輸出該最有效位元(MSB)之正確 數值,其饋入成為該階段2的MSB。在此時,每個階段的 近似閂鎖傳送此MSB,直到其到達該輸出。依類似的方 式,階段2將該第二MSB在输入上設定為1,並產生該输出 的第二MSB。該階段3將第三MSB設定為1,並產生該輸出 的第三MSB。階段4將最後的近似位元設定為1,並產生所 得到的输出之最後位元。在圖69的範例中,階段1 -4可相 等來簡化製造。 其可對於每個階段來實施其它的變化。舉例而言,為了 避免使用內部組件的沒有效率性,該參數記憶髏可由包含 該中間數值之單一閂鎖來取代,因為所有的输入近似位元 設定為已知的固定數值。階段2僅在該输入近似數值中具 有一未知的位元,所以僅需要有兩個閂鎮包含在來自該參 數RAM之中間及末端數值之間的一半之數值。該第三階段 3僅檢視4個數值,而該第四階段4僅檢視8個數值。此代表 該參數RAM不需要有四個相等的複本。而是,如果每個階 段設計來具有其所需要的最小量的參數RAM,所需要的儲 存量係僅等於該參數RAM的一個複本。不幸地是,每個階 段需要一獨立的RAM,其具有本身的位址解碼,因為每個 階段將在每個時脈循環上檢視一不同輸入數值之參數 值。(此對於第一階段非常簡單,其僅有一個數值要,,查 找」)0 -98- 終 123# 職 年 9aA sub-pixel rendering function (as described above) is performed on the image data, in which the gamma correction from the gamma table 631 is applied. The gamma table 631 may have an 11-bit input and a 14-bit output. In one example, the sub-pixel processing block 640 may be the same as block 624 of FIG. 64. The square rose 630 can use the 11-bit wide LUT from the gamma table 631 with a 14-bit output to perform the above-mentioned sub-pixel rendering function to apply the gamma adjustment. The space-time color mixing block 632 receives 14-bit data and outputs 8-bit data to an 8-bit CDLVDS of an LCD display 634. As a result, existing LVDS drivers and LCD displays can be used without the need for expensive redesign of LVDS drivers, timing controllers, or LCD panels, which can provide better benefits than the exemplary system of Figure 63. Please refer to FIG. 66, which shows an exemplary block diagram of a system that uses a pre-compensated lookup table (LUT) to compensate for the non-linear gamma response of the output display to provide sub-pixel rendering to improve image quality. VGA memory 635 stores image data in 8-bit format. The pre-compensation lookup table block 636 can store the values in an inverted gamma correction table, which can compensate the gamma response curve displayed on the output of the image data in the VGA memory 635. The gamma value in the correction table can provide a 26-bit value to provide a necessary gamma correction value equal to, for example, 3.3. The sub-pixel rendering processing block 637 may use the gamma values in Table 636 to provide the pre-compensation described above. In this way, the exemplary system uses sub-pixel rendering in the same "color space" as the output display, rather than in the color space of the input image stored in the VGA memory 635. The sub-pixel processing block 637 may transmit the processed data to a gamma output generation block 638 to perform the above ---------------------------- ------------- Post-gamma correction of 123801 to. This square can accept 29-bit input data and output 14-bit data. The space-time color mixing box 639 can be converted from the gamma output of an 8-bit LVDS square rose 640 to generate the data received by the square rose 638 to output an image on the display 641. Figures 6 7 to 69 show exemplary embodiments of a function evaluator that performs mathematical calculations, such as generating a gamma output value at high speed. The following specific embodiments can generate a small amount of gamma output from a large number of input values. This calculation can use monotonically increasing functions such as square root, power curve, and trigonometric functions. This is particularly useful for generating gamma correction curves. The following embodiments can use a binary search operation, which has multiple stages using a small parameter table. For example, each stage of the binary search can result in one more bit of precision in the output value. In this way, 8 stages can be used in an 8-bit output gamma correction function. The number of stages can be determined according to the data format size of the gamma correction function. Each stage can be done in parallel for a different input value, whereby the following specific embodiments can use a sequence of pipelines to receive a new input value on each clock cycle. The stages of this function evaluator are shown in Figures 69 and 70. Figure 6-7 shows the internal components of a phase of the function evaluator. Each stage can have a similar structure. Please refer to FIG. 67. In this stage, three input values are received, which include an 8-bit input value, a 4-bit approximate value, and a clock signal. The 8-bit input value is fed to a comparator 656 and an input latch 652 > The 4-bit approximate value is fed to the approximate latch 658. The clock signal is coupled to comparator 21, input latch 652, a single-bit result latch 660, approximate latch 658, and reference -96- f ia ^ (M κ-_ — 立-. Yue Yue丨 Number memory 654. The parameter memory can contain an rAM or ROM, and store parameter values, such as the parameter values shown in Figure 68. These parameter values correspond to the function of sqrt (x) and are used as examples. The 8-bit input and 4-bit approximation are exemplary and can have other bit formats. For example, the input can be a 24-bit value, and the approximation can be an 8-bit value. Now The operation of this phase will be explained. At the rising edge of the clock signal, the approximation is used to find one of the parameter values in a parameter memory 654. The output from the parameter memory 654 is provided by a comparator 656 Compare with the 8-bit input value to generate the result bit fed into the result latch 660. In an example, the result bit is 1, if the input value is greater than or equal to the parameter value, and if The input value is less than the parameter value, which is 0. On the trailing edge of the clock signal, the The input value, result bit, and approximate value are latched to latches 652, 660, and 658, respectively, to maintain the value for the next stage. Refer to Figure 68, a parameter table that can be stored in parameter memory 654 to calculate the A function of the square root of an 8-bit value. This function can be used for any kind of gamma correction function, and the resulting value can be rounded. Figure 69 shows one of the four stages (stage 1 to stage 4). Implement a function evaluator. Each of these stages can include the same components of FIG. 67 and can have the same structure. For example, each stage can include a parameter memory that stores the table of FIG. 8 so that the stage manages Will implement a square root function. The operation of the function evaluator will now be explained. An 8-bit input value is provided to stage 1, because the value flows from stage 1 to stage 4, and finally to the output, which has a continuous time Pulse cycle. That is, for each clock, the square root of each 8-bit value is calculated and the output is provided after phase 4. In one example, phase 1 can initialize the approximate value to 1,000 (Binary), and the result bit of stage 1 outputs the correct value of the most significant bit (MSB), which feeds into the MSB of stage 2. At this time, the approximate latch of each stage transmits this MSB until It reaches the output. In a similar manner, phase 2 sets the second MSB to 1 on the input and generates a second MSB of the output. Phase 3 sets the third MSB to 1 and generates the first MSB of the output. Three MSBs. Stage 4 sets the last approximate bit to 1 and produces the last bit of the resulting output. In the example of Figure 69, stages 1-4 can be equal to simplify manufacturing. It can be done for each stage Implement other changes. For example, to avoid the inefficiency of using internal components, the parameter memory can be replaced by a single latch containing the intermediate value, because all input approximate bits are set to a known fixed value. Phase 2 has only one unknown bit in the input approximate value, so only two latches are required to be included in the half value between the middle and end values from the parameter RAM. The third stage 3 only looks at 4 values, and the fourth stage 4 only looks at 8 values. This means that the parameter RAM does not need to have four equal copies. Instead, if each stage is designed to have the minimum amount of parametric RAM it needs, the required amount of storage is only equal to one copy of the parametric RAM. Unfortunately, each stage requires a separate RAM, which has its own address decoding, because each stage will view a parameter value of a different input value on each clock cycle. (This is very simple for the first stage, it has only one numerical value, find it.) 0 -98- ended 123 # vocational year 9a

El 圖70所示為圖69的階段如何對於一函數評估器來最佳 化。舉例而言,其可省略階段1之不必要的输出閂鎖,並 可由階段1省略該近似閂鎖。因此,耦合於比較器665及閂 鎖669之單一閂鎖672可用於階段1。在階段2中,該近似閂 鎖674僅需要具有一位元,而在階段3中,該近似閂鎖676 及677僅需要有兩個位元。此可繼續,直到階段4中該位元 中的一個即實施,藉此具有閂鎖680、681及682。在某些情 況下,其不需要該最低有效位元。對此組態的其它變化包 含移除階段4的输入值683閂鎖,因為其並未連接到另一個 階段。 圖7 1所示為上述方法的一範例性軟體實施700之流程 圖。一電腦系統,例如圖72的電腦系統750,其可用來執 行此軟體實施。 請參考圖70,初始時,一視窗應用702產生要顯示的一 影像。一視窗繪圖裝置介面(GDI)704傳送該影像資料(Vin) 來輸出到一顯示器。一次像素呈現及伽瑪修正應用708截 斷該输入影像資料Vin,其係導引到一視窗裝置資料介面 (DDI)706。此應用708可執行在以下附錄中之指令。視窗DDI 706透過一 VGA控制器714儲存接收的影像資料到一訊框緩 衝器記憶體716,而VGA控制器714透過一DVI纜線輸出該儲 存的影像資料到一顯示器718。 應用708截斷來自視窗GDI 7〇4之繪圖呼叫,導引該系統來 呈現習用的影像資料到一系統記憶體緩衝器71〇,而非到 該繪圖卡的訊框緩衝器716。應用708即轉換此習用的影像 -99- !I23«0i 資料到次像素呈現的資料。該次像素呈現的資料寫入到另 一個系統記憶體緩衝器712,其中該繪圖卡即格式化及經 由該DVI纜線轉移該資料到該顯示器。應用708可在該 PenTileTM次像素順序中來預先安排彩色。視窗DDI 706自系 統記憶體緩衝器712接收該次像素呈現的資料,並對該接 收的資料工作,如同該資料係來自視窗GDI 704。 圖72所示為用以實施圖46、49及51之方法,及/或圖71 之軟體實施700的範例性電腦系統750之內部方塊圖。電腦 系統750包含數個組件,其皆經由一系統匯流排760相互連 接。一系統匯流排760的範例為一雙向系統匯流排,其具 有3 2資料及位址線,用以存取一記憶體765,並用以在該 組件之間轉移資料。另外,多工的資料/位址線可以使用 來取代獨立的資料及位址線。記憶體765的範例包含一隨 機存取記憶體(RAM)、唯讀記憶體(ROM)、視訊記憶體、快 閃記憶體,或其它適當的記憶體裝置。額外的記憶裝置可 包含在電腦系統750中,例如像是固定及可移除的媒體(包 含磁性、光學、或磁性光儲存媒體)。 電腦系統750可經由一網路介面785連接於其它的運算系 統。網路介面785的範例包含乙太網路(Ethernet),或撥接電 話連接。電腦系統200亦可透過輸入/輸出(I/O)裝置770來接 收輸入。I/O裝置770的範例包含一鍵盤、指向裝置、或其 它適當的輸入裝置。I/O裝置770亦可代表外部儲存裝置或 運算系統或子系統。 電腦系統750包含一中央處理單元(CPU)755,其範例包含 -100- .- 〜年施】1τδ E|| 由Intel®公司所製造的微處理器之pentium®系列。但是,電 腦系統750可使用任何其它適當的微處理器、微-、迷你_ 或大型電腦之處理器。CPU 755亦設置來根據儲存在記憶體 765中的程式來進行上述的方法,其使用亦儲存在記憶體 765中的伽瑪及/或係數表。 記憶體765可儲存用以賁施該程式的指令或程式碼,其 使得電腦系統750來執行圖46、49及51,及圖71之軟體實 施700之方法。再者,電腦系統750包含有輸出次像素呈現 資料到一顯示器的一顯示介面780,其係經由圖46、49及 5 1之方法來產生。 因此,此處已經說明具有伽瑪調整之次像素呈現之方法 及系統。此處所述的伽瑪調整之某些具體實施例允許該次 像素配置的照度來匹配該人眼的照度通道之非線性伽瑪 反應,而該色差可匹配於該人眼的色差通道的線性反應。 在某些具體實施例中的伽瑪修正允許該演算法來獨立地 運作一顯示裝置的實際伽瑪。此處所揭示的次像素呈現, 相對於某些具有伽瑪調整之具體實施例,其可對於一顯示 裝置伽瑪值最佳化,以改善反應時間、點轉換平衡及對 比,因為該次像素呈現演算法之伽瑪修正及補償可透過次 像素呈現而提供所要的伽瑪值。這些技術的某些具體實施 例可附加於任何指定的伽瑪轉移曲線。 在先前的說明書中,本發明已參考其特定的範例性具體 實施例來說明。但是,其可瞭解到在不背離於所附申請專 利範圍中所提出的本發明之較廣泛的精神及範圍之下來 -101 - 進行不同的修正及改變。因此,該說明書及圖式應視為一 說明性的用途,而並非具有限制性。 附錄 以下為一範例性的C語言程式碼,其可用來實施此處所 揭示的方法。但是,以下的程式碼可以轉譯成任何其它適 當的可執行之程式語言來實施此處所揭示的技術。此外, 以下的程式碼具有著作權保護,其中著作權所有人保有此 處所包含的所有著作權。 //****氺氺氺氺**氺氺氺氺氺氺氺**氺氺氺氺氺氺氺氺*氺氺**氺氺氺氺氺氺*** //次像素呈現程序 staticlongBlueSum=0 ; //來自紅色及綠色之總和,儲存為藍色 unsigned char CalcSubP(BITMAPINFOHEADER*ib,int x,int y,int ox,int oy)El Figure 70 shows how the stages of Figure 69 can be optimized for a function estimator. For example, it may omit the unnecessary output latch of stage 1, and the approximate latch may be omitted by stage 1. Therefore, a single latch 672 coupled to the comparator 665 and the latch 669 can be used for Phase 1. In phase 2, the approximate latches 674 need only have one bit, while in phase 3, the approximate latches 676 and 677 need only have two bits. This can continue until one of the bits in phase 4 is implemented, thereby having latches 680, 681, and 682. In some cases, it does not require this least significant bit. Other changes to this configuration include removing the input value 683 latch of stage 4 because it is not connected to another stage. FIG. 71 shows a flowchart of an exemplary software implementation 700 of the method described above. A computer system, such as computer system 750 of Figure 72, can be used to execute this software implementation. Please refer to FIG. 70. Initially, a window application 702 generates an image to be displayed. A window drawing device interface (GDI) 704 sends the image data (Vin) for output to a display. A pixel rendering and gamma correction application 708 intercepts the input image data Vin, which is guided to a window device data interface (DDI) 706. This application 708 can execute the instructions in the appendix below. The Windows DDI 706 stores the received image data to a frame buffer memory 716 through a VGA controller 714, and the VGA controller 714 outputs the stored image data to a display 718 through a DVI cable. The application 708 intercepts the drawing call from the window GDI 704, and guides the system to present the conventional image data to a system memory buffer 71, rather than to the frame buffer 716 of the graphics card. Application 708 converts this custom image -99-! I23 «0i data to sub-pixel rendered data. The data presented by the sub-pixel is written into another system memory buffer 712, where the graphics card is formatted and transferred to the display via the DVI cable. The application 708 can pre-arrange colors in the PenTileTM sub-pixel order. Windows DDI 706 receives the data presented by the sub-pixel from the system memory buffer 712 and works on the received data as if the data were from Windows GDI 704. FIG. 72 shows an internal block diagram of an exemplary computer system 750 for implementing the methods of FIGS. 46, 49, and 51, and / or the software implementation 700 of FIG. 71. The computer system 750 includes several components, all of which are interconnected via a system bus 760. An example of a system bus 760 is a two-way system bus with 32 data and address lines for accessing a memory 765 and for transferring data between the components. In addition, multiplexed data / address lines can be used instead of separate data and address lines. Examples of the memory 765 include a random access memory (RAM), a read-only memory (ROM), a video memory, a flash memory, or other suitable memory devices. Additional memory devices may be included in the computer system 750, such as, for example, fixed and removable media (including magnetic, optical, or magnetic optical storage media). The computer system 750 can be connected to other computing systems via a network interface 785. Examples of the network interface 785 include Ethernet, or a telephone connection. The computer system 200 may also receive input through an input / output (I / O) device 770. Examples of I / O device 770 include a keyboard, pointing device, or other suitable input device. The I / O device 770 may also represent an external storage device or a computing system or subsystem. The computer system 750 includes a central processing unit (CPU) 755, examples of which include -100- .- ~ 年 施] 1τδ E || A microprocessor of the pentium® series manufactured by Intel® Corporation. However, computer system 750 may use any other suitable microprocessor, micro-, mini-, or processor for a mainframe computer. The CPU 755 is also configured to perform the above method according to a program stored in the memory 765, which uses a table of gamma and / or coefficients also stored in the memory 765. The memory 765 may store instructions or code for executing the program, which causes the computer system 750 to execute the method of the software implementation 700 of Figs. 46, 49, and 51, and Fig. 71. Furthermore, the computer system 750 includes a display interface 780 that outputs sub-pixel presentation data to a display, which is generated by the methods of FIGS. 46, 49, and 51. Therefore, the method and system of sub-pixel presentation with gamma adjustment have been described here. Certain specific embodiments of the gamma adjustment described herein allow the illumination of the sub-pixel configuration to match the nonlinear gamma response of the illumination channel of the human eye, and the color difference can match the linearity of the color difference channel of the human eye reaction. Gamma correction in certain embodiments allows the algorithm to independently operate the actual gamma of a display device. The sub-pixel rendering disclosed herein can optimize the gamma value of a display device to improve the response time, point conversion balance, and contrast compared to some specific embodiments with gamma adjustment, because the sub-pixel rendering The algorithm's gamma correction and compensation can provide the desired gamma value through sub-pixel rendering. Certain embodiments of these techniques can be added to any given gamma transfer curve. In the foregoing specification, the invention has been described with reference to specific exemplary embodiments thereof. However, it can be understood that various modifications and changes can be made without departing from the broader spirit and scope of the invention as set forth in the scope of the appended patent application. Accordingly, the description and drawings are to be regarded as illustrative purposes only, and not as restrictive. Appendix The following is an example C code that can be used to implement the method disclosed here. However, the following code can be translated into any other suitable executable programming language to implement the techniques disclosed herein. In addition, the following code is protected by copyright, in which the copyright owner retains all copyrights contained herein. // **** 氺 氺 氺 氺 ** 氺 氺 氺 氺 氺 氺 氺 ** 氺 氺 氺 氺 氺 氺 氺 氺 * 氺 氺 ** 氺 氺 氺 氺 氺 氺 ****** // Sub-pixel rendering program staticlongBlueSum = 0; // from the sum of red and green, stored as blue unsigned char CalcSubP (BITMAPINFOHEADER * ib, int x, int y, int ox, int oy)

long sum=0,cent,inner=0,edge,term ; long wcent,bwcent,wedge ; //歐米 修正的像素值 • · · _ mt i,j, //來自次像素位址之彩色成分 int color二((ox&l)A(oy&l))?GREEN:RED ; unsigned short*pre=color=RED?precomp:precomp+256 ; unsigned short*wgm=color=RED?wtable:wtable+256 ; //指標到濾波器 -102-long sum = 0, cent, inner = 0, edge, term; long wcent, bwcent, wedge; // Omega-corrected pixel values • · _ mt i, j, // color component from sub-pixel address int color Two ((ox & l) A (oy & l))? GREEN: RED; unsigned short * pre = color = RED? Precomp: precomp + 256; unsigned short * wgm = color = RED? Wtable: wtable + 256; / / Index-to-filter-102-

unsigned char*myf=filts+(((ox%S)+(oy%S)*S))*RGXsiz e*RGYsize ; unsigned long ccoef ; //儲存該中央係數 //遞迴歐米茄碼及該藍色總和 //提出該中央輸入像素,並保持一段時間 cent=PTX(x+l,y+l,color);unsigned char * myf = filts + (((ox% S) + (oy% S) * S)) * RGXsiz e * RGYsize; unsigned long ccoef; // store the central coefficient // return the omega code and the blue sum // Propose the central input pixel and keep it for a while cent = PTX (x + l, y + l, color);

wcent=wgm[cent]»8 ; //僅使用歐米前的8個位兀 bwcent=wtable[512+PIX(x+l,y+l,BLUE)]>>8 ; //查找該藍色歐 米茄中央值 inner=0 ; //計算所有項次 for(j=0 ; j<RGY size ; j++) { for(i=0 ; i<RGX size ; i++) {wcent = wgm [cent] »8; // Use only 8 bits before omega bwcent = wtable [512 + PIX (x + l, y + l, BLUE)] > >8; // Find the blue Color Omega central value inner = 0; // Calculate all terms for (j = 0; j < RGY size; j ++) {for (i = 0; i < RGX size; i ++) {

switch(Xi«4X〇//對於所有特定的情況來將該座 標雜混在一起 case 0x00: //角落像素項次 case 0x20: case 0x02: case 0x22: edge=PIX(x+i,y+j,color) ; //輸入像素永遠為 -103 - MMm κ 8位元 wedge=wgm[edge]»8 ; // 在查找歐米 茄之後, / /其為16,退回8,現在其為8位元 //該角落像素及該中央像素的平均仍為9位 元 term=:(wedge+wcent)/2 ; //在該預運算表中檢視該平均,使其為 1 6位元 term=pre[term]; //乘以該濾波器係數,必須使結果為24位元。 //但是,我們使用乘法器的第一資料庫來得 到一 1 6位元結果 //內部除以256(或不計算該較低的8位元) term=(term*(unsignedlong)(*myf++))»8 ; //然後在乘法器的第二資料庫中,我們將該 伽瑪修正項次乘以 //該未伽瑪修正的输入值。此可有效地加1 //到該伽瑪項次的指數。 term=(term*edge)»8 ; -104- 待 11MU t //因為該項次乘以 //係數而加總為1,此總和永遠可匹配於1 6 位元。 sum+=term ; break ; case 0x10: //正 交邊緣像素項次 case 0x01: case 0x21: case 0x12: edge=PIX(x+i,y+j,BLUE); //得到相同的藍 色像素 色歐米茄 藍色 表中查找 wedge^wtablel^lS+edge]〉^;//將其執行該藍 //表 term^wedge+bwcent)/^ ; //平均化,其中央 term=precomp[512+term] ; //然後在 GinvWinv //表switch (Xi «4X〇 // For all specific cases, the coordinates are mixed together case 0x00: // corner pixel term case 0x20: case 0x02: case 0x22: edge = PIX (x + i, y + j, color); // The input pixel is always -103-MMm κ 8-bit wedge = wgm [edge] »8; // After looking for Omega, // it is 16, return 8 and now it is 8 bits // The average of the corner pixel and the central pixel is still 9 bits term = :( wedge + wcent) / 2; // view the average in the pre-calculation table to make it 16 bits term = pre [term] ; // Multiply by the filter coefficient, the result must be 24 bits. // However, we use the first database of the multiplier to get a 16-bit result // divide internally by 256 (or do not calculate the Lower 8 bits) term = (term * (unsignedlong) (* myf ++)) »8; // then in the second database of the multiplier, we multiply the gamma correction term by // the unsigned Gamma correction input value. This can effectively add 1 // to the index of the gamma term. Term = (term * edge) »8; -104- to be 11MU t // because the term is multiplied // Coefficients add up to 1, this sum will always match 1 6 bits. Sum + = term; break; case 0x10: // orthogonal edge pixel term case 0x01: case 0x21: case 0x12: edge = PIX (x + i, y + j, BLUE); // get the same Look at the blue pixel color omega blue table wedge ^ wtablel ^ lS + edge]> ^; // Implement it blue // table term ^ wedge + bwcent) / ^; // averaging, its central term = precomp [512 + term]; // Then in GinvWinv // table

Blue Sum+=terns//加總,並稍後儲存給藍Blue Sum + = terns // total and save to blue later

色計算用 edge=PIX(x+i,y+j,color) ; //輸入像素永遠 -105-Color calculation with edge = PIX (x + i, y + j, color); // The input pixel is always -105-

為8位元 wedge=wgm[edge]>>8 ; //在歐米前中查找之 後,其為1 6 //退回8,現在其為8位元 //一邊緣像素及該中央像素的平均仍為 9位元 term=(wedge+wcent)/2 ; //在該預先運算表中查找該平均,使其 為1 6位元 次 些加總為4 次 term=pre[term]; //這些邊緣項次係加總來計算該中央項 //此將必須為一 18位元數目,來保持這 inner+二term ; //加總該邊緣來在稍後計算該中央項 //乘以該濾波器係數,其必須使該結果 為24位元 //但是,我們使用乘法器的第一資料庫 來得到一 16位元的結果 -106- 乐 //內部除以256(或不計算該較低的8位 元) term=(term*(unsigned long)(*myf++))»8 ; //然後在乘法器的第二資料庫中,我們將該 伽瑪修正項次乘以 //該未伽瑪修正的輸入值。此可有效地加1 //到該伽瑪項次的指數 term=:(term*edge)»8 ; //因為該項次乘以 //係數加總到1,此總和可永遠符合在1 6位元 sum+^term ; break ; caseOxll: //中央像素 ccoef=(long)(*myf++) ; //用以稍後僅取用該 中央係數 break ; //該4個內項次的總和除以4來 inner»=2 ; 得到該16位元平均 inner=(inner*ccoef)»8 ; //然後其乘以該中央係數 -107- IMMU t 年月日 sum+=(inner*cent)»8 ; //最後乘以該中央值,完成該濾 波器的外部總和 if(sharpen) { if(color=RED) //切換到該交叉彩色 color=GREEN ; · else color=RED ; //現在尖銳度永遠為非伽瑪修正的數值所完 //所以,除了不考慮精度,我們可大致保持 //因為我們將數目由8位元變為1位元 //在除以該尖銳度係數(1/8及1/3 2) //中央*256來得到16位元,然後乘以1/8 sum+=PIX(x+l,y+l,color)*32 ; //角落項次為*256,然後/32,得到*8 sum=PIX(x,y+2,color)*8 ; sum=PIX(x+2,y+25color)*8 ; sum=PIX(x+2,ycolor)*8 ; sum=max(x,y,color)*8 ; sum=max(0?sum) ; //尖銳度可造成負數 -108-Is 8-bit wedge = wgm [edge] >8; // After searching in Omega, it is 1 6 // Return to 8, now it is 8-bit // an edge pixel and the center pixel The average is still 9-bit term = (wedge + wcent) / 2; // look up the average in the pre-calculation table to make it 16-bit times and add up to 4 times term = pre [term]; / / The marginal terms are summed to calculate the central term // this will have to be an 18-bit number to keep the inner + two term; // add the margin to calculate the central term later // multiply by The filter coefficient, which must make the result 24 bits // But we use the first database of the multiplier to get a 16 bit result -106- music // internally divided by 256 (or do not calculate the Lower 8 bits) term = (term * (unsigned long) (* myf ++)) »8; // then in the second database of the multiplier, we multiply the gamma correction term by // the Ungamma-corrected input value. This can effectively add 1 // to the index of the gamma term term = :( term * edge) »8; // Because the term is multiplied by // the coefficients add up to 1, this sum can always match at 1 6-bit sum + ^ term; break; caseOxll: // central pixel ccoef = (long) (* myf ++); // to take only the central coefficient break later; // the sum of the 4 inner terms Take 4 to inner »= 2; get the 16-bit average inner = (inner * ccoef)» 8; // then multiply it by the central coefficient -107- IMMU t year month day sum + = (inner * cent) »8 ; // Finally multiply by the central value to complete the external sum of the filter if (sharpen) {if (color = RED) // switch to the cross color color = GREEN; · else color = RED; // now sharpness It is always done by non-gamma-corrected values. // So, apart from not considering accuracy, we can roughly keep // because we changed the number from 8 bits to 1 bit. // Divided by the sharpness coefficient (1 / 8 and 1/3 2) // Central * 256 to get 16 bits, then multiply by 1/8 sum + = PIX (x + l, y + l, color) * 32; // The corner term is * 256, Then / 32, we get * 8 sum = PIX (x, y + 2, color) * 8; sum = PIX (x + 2, y + 25col or) * 8; sum = PIX (x + 2, ycolor) * 8; sum = max (x, y, color) * 8; sum = max (0? sum); // Sharpness can cause negative numbers -108-

123 麵 I sum=min(sum,ginmask); //或大於8位元的數目 //調整來輸出表 sum=(sum*goutdiv)/(ginmask+l); 大小 if(color=RED) sum=gwmt[sam] ; //使用該11位元數目來查找輸 出伽瑪123 faces I sum = min (sum, ginmask); // or more than 8 bits // adjust to output table sum = (sum * goutdiv) / (ginmask + l); size if (color = RED) sum = gwmt [sam]; // Use this 11-bit number to find the output gamma

else sum=gamat[sum+goutdiv] ; //紅色使用_可能不同的表格 return((unsignedchar)(sum)) ; // 傳回次像素 //計算該藍色數值的程序 unsigned char Blue Filter (BITMAPINFOHEADER *ib? int x?int y?int ox,int oy) {else sum = gamat [sum + goutdiv]; // red uses _ may be different from the form return ((unsignedchar) (sum)); // returns the sub-pixel // the program that calculates the blue value unsigned char Blue Filter (BITMAPINFOHEADER * ib? int x? int y? int ox, int oy) {

long sum=0 ; long teml,tem2 ; //診斷變數 unsignedchar *myf ; int i,j ; //迴圏計數器 myf=bfilts+(((ox%S)+(oy%S)*S))*BlueXsize*BlueYsize ; BlueSum>>=3 ; //採取所有那些藍色總和的平均 //此使得藍色總和再次為16位元數目 -109- IX3#Q4fe - Ά ) V - k for(j=0 ; j<BlueYsize ; j++) { for(i=0 ; i<BlueXsize ; i++) { teml二PIX(x+i,y+j,BLUE) ; //提出該藍色像素 tem2=(teml**myf++)»8 ; //8* 16=16乘以係數 teml=(tem2*BlueSum)>>8 ; //相同於遞迴總和值long sum = 0; long teml, tem2; // diagnostic variable unsignedchar * myf; int i, j; // return counter myf = bfilts + (((ox% S) + (oy% S) * S)) * BlueXsize * BlueYsize; BlueSum > > = 3; // Take the average of all those blue sums // This makes the blue sum again a 16-bit number -109- IX3 # Q4fe-)) V-k for (j = 0 ; J <BlueYsize; j ++) {for (i = 0; i <BlueXsize; i ++) {teml two PIX (x + i, y + j, BLUE); // Propose the blue pixel tem2 = (teml ** myf ++ ) »8; // 8 * 16 = 16 times the coefficient teml = (tem2 * BlueSum) > >8; // Same as recursive sum value

} }}}

BlueSum=0 ; //將其初始化來進行下一個藍色 sum=(sum*goutdiv)/(ginmask+l); sum=gamat[sum+goutdiv*2]; return((unsigned char)(sum)) ; //傳回藍色超級像素值 〇BlueSum = 0; // Initialize it for the next blue sum = (sum * goutdiv) / (ginmask + l); sum = gamat [sum + goutdiv * 2]; return ((unsigned char) (sum)) ; // Return the blue superpixel value.

-110- 1238011 CRT 陰極射線管 LCD 液晶顯不器 MTF 調變轉換函數 FPGA 場域程式閘極陣列 VGA 視訊繪圖卡 ASIC 特定應用積體電路 LVDS 低電壓差動發信 EDID 延伸的顯示識別資訊 DVI 數位視覺介面 ROM 唯讀記憶體 RAM 隨機存取記憶髖 MSB 最高有效位元 GDI 繪圖裝置介面 LUT 查找表 20 配置 21 三色像素元件 22 藍色放射器 23 藍色平面取樣點 24 紅色放射器 26 綠色放射器 -Ill --110- 1238011 CRT Cathode Ray Tube LCD Liquid Crystal Display MTF Modulation Transfer Function FPGA Field Program Gate Array VGA Video Graphics Card ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signaling EDID Extended Display Identification Information DVI Digital Visual interface ROM Read-only memory RAM Random access memory Hip MSB Most significant bit GDI Drawing device interface LUT lookup table 20 Configuration 21 Three-color pixel element 22 Blue emitter 23 Blue plane sampling point 24 Red emitter 26 Green emission -Ill-

,1231¾¾ 丨 - ~ —&ij 28 放射器 30、31 配置 32 藍色放射器 33 重構點 34 紅色放射器 35 重構點 36 綠色放射器 37 重構點 38 配置 39 三色像素元件 40 配置 42 藍色平面 44 取樣區域 46 有效藍色取樣點 48 紅色平面 50 邊緣區域 51 有效紅色取樣點 52 中央區域 53 输出樣本區域 54、 55、 56 有效取樣區域 57 有效綠色取樣點, 1231¾¾ 丨-~ — & ij 28 emitter 30, 31 configuration 32 blue emitter 33 reconstruction point 34 red emitter 35 reconstruction point 36 green emitter 37 reconstruction point 38 configuration 39 tri-color pixel element 40 configuration 42 Blue plane 44 Sampling area 46 Effective blue sampling point 48 Red plane 50 Edge area 51 Effective red sampling point 52 Central area 53 Output sample area 54, 55, 56 Effective sampling area 57 Effective green sampling point

-112- jl238«ii .了 .上、一: / ι 58、59 60 70 72 74 76 78 80 82、84、86、88 92、94、96、98 100、 102 104、 106、 108 120 122 123、 124 125 127 202 204 206 有效取樣區域 綠色平面 像素資料格式 有效樣本區域 樣本點陣列 配置 配置 陣列 樣本區域 樣本區域 配置 陣列 輸入樣本區域 三色樣本點 有效次像素呈現取樣區域 有效樣本區域 綠色輸入樣本區域 重覆單元 正方形次像素 實線 呈現邊界-112- jl238 «ii. Up. Up, one: / ι 58, 59 60 70 72 74 76 78 80 82, 84, 86, 88 92, 94, 96, 98 100, 102 104, 106, 108 120 122 123 、 124 125 127 202 204 206 Effective sampling area Green flat pixel data format Effective sample area Sample point array configuration Configuration array Sample area Sample area configuration Array input sample area Repeated unit square sub-pixel solid line rendering boundary

-113 - 208 fmmi 210 區域 212 原始像素樣本區域 216、 218、 220、 222次像素 224、 226、 228 次像素 230 對稱線 234、 236、 238 次像素 240、 242、 244 次像素 246、 250、 254 呈現區域 248、 252、 256 樣本區域 260、 262 > 268 樣本區域 264、 266 呈現區域 270 像素區域 272 原始像素邊界 274 藍色輸出像素邊界 276 正方形取樣區域 280 樣本區域 500 次像素處理單元 501 個人運算裝置 504 次像素呈現模組 506 時序控制器 508 DVI輸入-113-208 fmmi 210 area 212 raw pixel sample area 216, 218, 220, 222 sub pixels 224, 226, 228 sub pixels 230 symmetry lines 234, 236, 238 sub pixels 240, 242, 244 sub pixels 246, 250, 254 Rendering area 248, 252, 256 Sample area 260, 262 > 268 Sample area 264, 266 Rendering area 270 Pixel area 272 Original pixel boundary 274 Blue output pixel boundary 276 Square sampling area 280 Sample area 500 times Pixel processing unit 501 Personal operation 504 sub-pixel rendering module 506 timing controller 508 DVI input

-114 MMm I El 509 介面 510 顯示識別資訊單元 512 輸入閂鎖及自動偵測方塊 514 時序緩衝器及控制方瑰 516 預調整伽瑪處理方塊 518 線緩衝器方塊 519 3x3資料取樣方瑰 520 乘法器+加法器方塊 521 延遲邏輯方塊 522 後伽瑪處理方塊 524 輸出閂鎖 526 LVDS輸出 528 輸出同步產生階段 530 係數處理方塊 531 係數表 532 輸入閂鎖 534 混色方塊 536 參考電壓及視訊傳送電壓方塊 537 資料匯流排 538 直流/直流轉換器 539A 行驅動器控制-114 MMm I El 509 interface 510 Display identification information unit 512 Input latch and automatic detection block 514 Timing buffer and control box 516 Pre-adjusted gamma processing box 518 Line buffer box 519 3x3 data sampling square box 520 Multiplier + Adder block 521 Delay logic block 522 Post-gamma processing block 524 Output latch 526 LVDS output 528 Output synchronization generation stage 530 Coefficient processing block 531 Coefficient table 532 Input latch 534 Mixed color block 536 Reference voltage and video transmission voltage block 537 Data Bus 538 DC / DC converter 539A line driver control

-115--115-

539B 列驅動器控制 540 局部平均處理方塊 542 預伽瑪處理方塊 544 歐米茄處理方塊 545 預伽瑪處理方塊 547 桶偏移器 554、 556、 558 線緩衝器 560、 562 總和緩衝器 564、 566、 568 加法器 570、 572 線緩衝器 573、 574 桶偏移器 575、 576、 578、 581 加法器 580、 582 線緩衝器 583、 584、 585 總和緩衝器 590 桶偏移器 591、 592、 593、 594 加法器 613 VGA記憶體 614 次像素呈現方塊 615 寬DAC或LVDS輸出 616 顯示器 617、 623、 629、 635 VGA記憶體 -116-539B Column driver control 540 Local average processing block 542 Pre-gamma processing block 544 Omega processing block 545 Pre-gamma processing block 547 Bucket offset 554, 556, 558 Line buffers 560, 562 Sum buffers 564, 566, 568 Addition 570, 572 line buffer 573, 574 barrel offset 575, 576, 578, 581 adder 580, 582 line buffer 583, 584, 585 sum buffer 590 barrel offset 591, 592, 593, 594 addition 613 VGA memory 614 sub-pixel rendering box 615 wide DAC or LVDS output 616 display 617, 623, 629, 635 VGA memory -116-

618、624、630、637次像素呈現方塊 619、 626、 631 620、 627 621、 628、 641 632、 639 633 634 636 638 640 652 654 656 658 660 伽瑪表 CRTDAC 或 LVDS 方塊 顯示器618, 624, 630, 637 sub-pixel rendering squares 619, 626, 631 620, 627 621, 628, 641 632, 639 633 634 636 638 640 652 654 656 658 660 Gamma table CRTDAC or LVDS square display

空間-時間混色方瑰 LCD LVDS方塊 LCD顯示器 預補償查找表方塊 伽瑪输出產生方塊 LVDS方瑰 輸入閂鎖 參數記憶體 比較器 近似閂鎖 單一位元結果閂鎖 665、666、667、668 比較器 669、670、671、672 閂鎖 673、674、675、676 閂鎖 677、678、680、681 閂鎖 682 閂鎖 視窗應用 -117- 702 Ύ“月::yj 704 視窗繪圖裝置介面 706 視窗裝置資料介面 708 次像素呈現及伽瑪修正應用 710、 712 系統記憶體緩衝器 714 VGA控制器 716 訊框緩衝器記憶體 718 顯示器 750 電腦系統 755 中央處理單元 760 系統匯流排 765 記憶體 770 輸入/輸出(I/O)裝置 780 顯示介面 785 網路介面Space-time color mixing square cube LCD LVDS cube LCD display pre-compensated lookup table cube gamma output generation cube LVDS square cube input latch parameter memory comparator approximate latch single bit result latch 665, 666, 667, 668 comparator 669, 670, 671, 672 latches 673, 674, 675, 676 latches 677, 678, 680, 681 latches 682 latches Windows applications -117- 702 Data interface 708 sub-pixel rendering and gamma correction application 710, 712 system memory buffer 714 VGA controller 716 frame buffer memory 718 display 750 computer system 755 central processing unit 760 system bus 765 memory 770 input / output (I / O) device 780 display interface 785 network interface

-118--118-

Claims (1)

fmm\ 、年9a# — \!i 拾、申請專利範圍 1. 一種用於處理包含像素的一顯示器之資料的方法,其每 個像素具有彩色的次像素,該方法包含: 接收像素資料;fmm \ 、 year 9a # — \! i Scope of patent application 1. A method for processing data of a display containing pixels, each pixel having a color sub-pixel, the method includes: receiving pixel data; 應用伽瑪調整到由該像素資料到次像素呈現資料的 轉換,該轉換產生一次像素配置的該次像素呈現的資 料,其包含在一水平軸及一垂直軸中至少一個之上的交 替之紅色及綠色次像素;及 输出該次像素呈現的資料。 2. 如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該應用的伽瑪調整 可提供該次像素呈現資料之彩色平衡中的線性度。 3. 如申請專利範圍第2項之方法,其中該應用的伽瑪調整 進一步提供關於該次像素呈現資料之照度的非線性計 算。Applying a gamma adjustment to the conversion from the pixel data to the sub-pixel rendering data, the conversion produces the sub-pixel rendering data of a primary pixel configuration, which includes alternating red colors on at least one of a horizontal axis and a vertical axis And green sub-pixels; and output the data presented by that sub-pixel. 2. The method according to item 1 of the patent application range, wherein the applied gamma adjustment can provide linearity in the color balance of the sub-pixel presentation data. 3. The method according to item 2 of the patent application, wherein the applied gamma adjustment further provides a non-linear calculation of the illuminance of the sub-pixel presentation data. 4.如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該應用的伽瑪調整 包含:對該像素資料執行伽瑪修正來產生伽瑪修正的資 料;轉換該伽瑪修正的資料到該次像素呈現的資料。 5 ·如申請專利範圍第4項之方法,其中該伽瑪修正係執行 為g-1(x)=xY的函數。 6 .如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該伽瑪調整的一伽 瑪值對於所有的空間頻率係維持在一選擇的位準,該選 擇的位準係對應於在某個空間頻率上一所要的對比比 例。 7.如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該應用的伽瑪調整 修 吏 Ι2-3Ϊμ1 :·, 〜、 t :]—」!j 包含基於該像素資料來計算一局部平均。 8如申請專利範圍第7項之方法,其中該應用的伽瑪調整 進一步包含在該局部平均上執行伽瑪修正,以產生一伽 瑪修正的局部平均,並轉換乘以該像素資料的該伽瑪修 正的局部平均成為該次像素呈現的資料。 9. 如申請專利範圍第8項之方法,其中該伽瑪修正係執行 為g·1⑻的函數。 10. 如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該伽瑪調整的一伽 瑪值係選擇來隨著空間頻率增加而增加。 ^ 11. 如申請專利範圍第1項之方法,其中該應用的伽瑪調整 包含:對於該像素資料執行歐米茄修正來產生歐米茄修 正的資料;及基於該歐米茄修正的資料來計算一歐米茄 修正的局部平均。 12. 如申請專利範圍第1 1項之方法,其中該歐米茄修正係執 行為w(x)=x1/v^函數。 13. 如申請專利範圍第11項之方法,其中該應用的伽瑪調整 進一步包含: 籲 對於該歐米茄修正的局部平均執行伽瑪修正,以產生 一具有歐米茄修正的伽瑪局部平均;及 轉換乘以該像素資料的該具有歐米茄修正的伽瑪局 部平均成為該次像素呈現的資料。 14如申請專利範圍第1 3項之方法,其中該伽瑪修正係執行 為 gdw-WMxW)7·1的函數。 15.—種對於能夠使用三色次像素元件顯示次像素呈現的 MMm 1 ^ , + n m .....一一〜-------二1J 資料之顯示器來轉換一影像的取樣資料之方法,該方法 包含: 接收包含複數個第一資料值的取樣資料,每個第一資 料值代表在該影像中每個彩色的每個資料點; 對於該取樣資料中每個該第一資料值執行伽瑪修 正,以產生伽瑪修正的資料;及 基於該伽瑪修正的資料來計算包含複數個第二資料 值的次像素呈現的資料,每個第二資料值係對應於該顯 示器上每個彩色的每個次像素元件。 16·如申請專利範圍第1 5項之方法,其中該計算該次像素呈 現的資料包含計算在該顯示器上一次像素配置,其包含 在一水平軸及一垂直軸中至少一個上的交替之紅色及 綠色次像素元件。 17·如申請專利範圍第1 5項之方法,其中該計算該次像素呈 現的資料包含: 參考包含複數個係數項次之濾波器核心; 將每個該第一資料值的該伽瑪修正的資料乘以在該 濾波器核心中每個相對應的一個係數項次;及 加入每個相乘的項次來產生每個該第二資料值。 18·如申請專利範圍第1 5項之方法,其中該伽瑪修正補償人 眼對於照度的反應函數。 19·如申請專利範圍第1 5項之方法,進一步包含 對於該次像素呈現的資料執行後伽瑪修正,該後伽瑪 修正補償了該顯示器所配備的一伽瑪功能;及 [U—JL 輸出該後伽瑪修正的次像素呈現資料到該顯示器。 20. 如申請專利範圍第1 5項之方法,其中該伽瑪修正係執行 為 g_1(X)=XY〇 21. 如申請專利範圍第1 5項之方法,進一步包含 決定每個彩色的該每個資料點之取樣的資料中所指 定的樣本區域;及 決定對應於每個彩色的每個次像素元件之重新取樣 區域,而其中該計算該次像素呈現的資料包含使用一濾 波器核心中的複數個係數項次,每個係數項次代表該重 新取樣區域中給定的一個重疊於每個具有該重新取樣 區域中該給定的一個之指定的樣本區域之重疊百分比。 22. —種對於能夠使用三色次像素元件顯示次像素呈現的 資料之顯示器來轉換一影像的取樣資料之方法,該方法 包含: 接收包含複數個第一資料值的取樣資料,每個第一資 料值代表在該影像中每個彩色的每個資料點; 對於該取樣的資料中每個該第一資料值來產生伽瑪 修正的資料值;及 基於該伽瑪修正的資料值與該第一資料值的乘積來 計算包含複數個第二資料值的次像素呈現的資料,每個 第二資料值係對應於該顯示器上每個彩色的每個次像 素元件。 23.如申請專利範圍第22項之方法,其中該計算該次像素呈 現的資料包含計算在該顯示器上一次像素配置,其包含 l:JL 在一水平軸及一垂直軸中至少一個上的交替之紅色及 綠色次像素元件。 24·如申請專利範圍第22項之方法,其中該產生伽瑪調整的 資料值包含: 基於該取樣的資料來計算每個該第一資料值的一局 部平均;及 對於該局部平均執行伽瑪調整。 25·如申請專利範圍第24項之方法,其中該伽瑪調整係執行 為g-Hxhf1的函數。 鲁 26·如申請專利範圍第24項之方法,其中該第一資料值包含 邊緣項次及一中央項次,而該計算該局部平均包含: 利用每個邊緣項次的該中央項次來計算一第一平均; 基於該第一平均來計算該中央項次的一第二平均。 27·如申請專利範圍第24項之方法,其中該第一資料值包含 邊緣項次及一中央項次,而該計算該局部平均包含利用 每個邊緣項次的該中央項次來計算一平均,該產生的伽 瑪調整的資料值進一步包含: · 使用該邊緣項次的該伽瑪調整的平均來產生該中央 項次的一伽瑪調整的局部平均。 28·如申請專利範圍第2 2項之方法,其中該計算該次像素呈 現的資料包含: 參考包含複數個係數項次之濾波器核心; 將每個該第一資料值的該伽瑪調整的資料乘以在該 濾波器核心中每個相對應的一個係數項次及每個該第 - 卜、H’j Ell 一資料值;及 加入每個相乘的項次來產生每個該第二資料值。 29. 如申請專利範圍第22項之方法,其中該伽瑪調整的資料 值及該第一資料值的乘積可補償人眼對照度的一反應 函數。 30. 如申請專利範圍第2 2項之方法,進一步包含: 對於該次像素呈現的資料執行後伽瑪修正,該後伽瑪 修正補償了該顯示器所配備的一伽瑪功能;及 输出該後伽瑪修正的次像素呈現的資料到該顯示器。 31. 如申請專利範圍第22項之方法,進一步包含: 決定每個彩色的該每個資料點之取樣的資料中所指 定的樣本區域;及 決定對應於每個彩色的每個次像素元件之重新取樣 區域, 而其中該計算該次像素呈現的資料包含使用一濾波 器核心中的複數個係數項次,每個係數項次代表該重新 取樣區域中給定的一個重疊於每個具有該重新取樣區 域中該給定的一個之指定的樣本區域之重叠百分比。 32. 如申請專利範圍第3 1項之方法,其中該第一資料值包含 角落項次、除了該角落項次的邊緣項次,及一中央項 次,而該計算該次像素呈現的資料包含: 相對於由每個該角落項次之重疊百分比所代表者,較 少地利用該第一資料值的相對應的一個;及 相對於由該中央項次之重疊百分比所代表者,較多地 I |Ϊ2^(Μ M … - 1#:月-:'.日 利用該第一資料值的相對應的一個。 33·如申請專利範圍第22項之方法,其中該第一資料值包含 角落項次、除了該角落項次的邊緣項次,及一中央項 次,而該計算該次像素呈現的資料包含: 減弱該角落項次的效應;及 加強該中央項目的效應來平衡該減弱化。 34·如申請專利範圍第33項之方法,其中該乘積使用了該邊 緣項次及該中央項次的一第一彩色中的該第一資料 值,而該減弱化及加強化係使用該角落項次及該中央項 ® 次的一第二彩色中的該第一資料值。 35. 如申請專利範圍第22項之方法,其中該產生伽瑪調整的 資料值包含: 基於該取樣的資料來計算每個該第一資料值的一歐 米茄調整的局部平均;及 對於該歐米茄調整的局部平均執行伽瑪調整。 36. 如申請專利範圍第3 5項之方法,其中該計算該歐米茄調 整的局部平均包含: _ 對於該取樣的資料中每個該第一資料值來執行歐米 茄調整;及 基於該歐米茄調整的取樣資料來決定每個該第一資 料值的一局部平均。 37. 如申請專利範圍第36項之方法,其中該歐米茄調整為一 人眼對照度之反應函數的近似。 38.如申請專利範圍第3 5項之方法,其中該伽瑪調整係執行 f 12臟11 E] 為 g Iw-1(X)=(W“(X))Y_1,其中 W-1(X)為 w(x)=x1/w的倒轉函數。 39. 如申請專利範圍第35項之方法,其中該第一資料值包含 邊緣項次及一中央項次,而該計算該歐米茄調整的局部 平均包含: 利用每個該邊緣項次之中央項次來計算一第一歐米 茄調整的平均; 基於該第一歐米茄調整的平均來計算該中央項次的 一第二歐米茄調整的平均。 40. 如申請專利範圍第35項之方法,其中該第一資料值包含 ® 邊緣項次及一中央項次,而該計算該歐米茄調整的局部 平均包含利用每個該邊緣項次之中央項次來計算一歐 米茄調整的平均,該產生的伽瑪調整的資料值進一步包 含: 使用該邊緣項次的該伽瑪調整的平均來產生該中央 項次的一伽瑪調整的局部平均。 41. 如申請專利範圍第22項之方法,其中該產生伽瑪調整的 資料值包含: 籲 執行該第一資料值的歐米茄調整;及 執行倒轉歐米茄調整來產生該伽瑪調整的資料值,使 得該歐米茄調整及該倒轉歐米茄調整可在當該影像的 泛間頻率成為更局時來更多地影響該伽瑪調整的資料 值。 42·—種用於處理包含像素之顯示器的資料之系統,每個像 素具有彩色次像素,該系統包含: Jt h:. .. i —[.…月 Η 一接收模組,用以接收像素資料;及 一處理模組,用以執行由該像素資料到次像素呈現資 料的轉換,並應用伽瑪調整到該轉換,該轉換產生一次 像素配置的該次像素呈現的資料,其包含在一水平軸及 一垂直軸中至少一個之上的交替之紅色及綠色次像素。 43.如申請專利範圍第42項之系統,其中該處理模組係要提 供該次像素呈現的資料之彩色平衡中的線性度。 44·如申請專利範圍第43項之系統,其中該處理模組係要提 供關於該次像素呈現的資料之照度的非線性計算。 45. 如申請專利範圍第42項之系統,其中該處理模組係要對 該像素資料執行伽瑪修正,以產生伽瑪修正的資料,並 轉換該伽瑪修正的資料到該次像素呈現的資料。 46. 如申請專利範圉第45項之系統,其中該處理模組係要執 行使用如g^(x:)=xY之函數的伽瑪修正。 47. 如申請專利範圍第42項之系統,其中該處理模組係將該 伽瑪調整的一伽瑪值對於所有的空間頻率來維持在一 選擇的位準,該選擇的位準係對應於在某個空間頻率下 一所要的對比比例。 48. 如申請專利範圍第42項之系統,其中該處理模組基於該 像素資料來計算一局部平均。 49. 如申請專利範圍第48項之系統,其中該處理模組係對於 該局部平均執行伽瑪修正,以產生一伽瑪修正的局部平 均,而該處理模組係要轉換乘以該像素資料的該伽瑪修 正的局部平均成為該次像素呈現的資料。4. The method according to item 1 of the patent application scope, wherein the applied gamma adjustment includes: performing a gamma correction on the pixel data to generate the gamma corrected data; converting the gamma corrected data to the sub-pixel rendered data. 5. The method according to item 4 of the patent application, wherein the gamma correction is performed as a function of g-1 (x) = xY. 6. The method according to item 1 of the patent application range, wherein a gamma value of the gamma adjustment is maintained at a selected level for all spatial frequencies, and the selected level corresponds to a certain spatial frequency. A desired contrast ratio. 7. The method of claim 1 in the scope of the patent application, wherein the applied gamma is adjusted. I2-3Ϊμ1: ·, ~, t:]! "! J includes calculating a local average based on the pixel data. 8. The method according to item 7 of the patent application scope, wherein the applied gamma adjustment further comprises performing a gamma correction on the local average to generate a gamma corrected local average, and converting the gamma multiplied by the pixel data The modified local average of the pixels becomes the data presented by the sub-pixel. 9. The method of claim 8 in which the gamma correction is performed as a function of g · 1g. 10. The method according to item 1 of the patent application range, wherein a gamma value of the gamma adjustment is selected to increase as the spatial frequency increases. ^ 11. The method according to item 1 of the patent application range, wherein the applied gamma adjustment includes: performing omega correction on the pixel data to generate omega corrected data; and calculating an omega corrected part based on the omega corrected data. average. 12. The method according to item 11 of the scope of patent application, wherein the omega correction is a function of w (x) = x1 / v ^. 13. The method according to item 11 of the scope of patent application, wherein the applied gamma adjustment further comprises: calling on the local average of the omega correction to perform a gamma correction to produce a local local gamma average with the omega correction; and a conversion multiplication The local average of the gamma with the omega correction based on the pixel data becomes the data presented by the sub-pixel. 14. The method according to item 13 of the scope of patent application, wherein the gamma correction is performed as a function of gdw-WMxW) 7.1. 15.—A kind of sample data for converting an image to a MMm 1 ^, + nm that can display sub-pixel presentation using a three-color sub-pixel element. The method includes: receiving sampling data including a plurality of first data values, each first data value representing each data point of each color in the image; for each of the first data in the sampling data Value to perform gamma correction to generate gamma-corrected data; and based on the gamma-corrected data to calculate data represented by sub-pixels containing a plurality of second data values, each second data value corresponding to the display Each sub-pixel element of each color. 16. The method according to item 15 of the scope of patent application, wherein calculating the data presented by the sub-pixel includes calculating the pixel configuration on the display, which includes alternating red on at least one of a horizontal axis and a vertical axis And green sub-pixel elements. 17. The method according to item 15 of the scope of patent application, wherein the data for calculating the sub-pixel presentation includes: referring to a filter core including a plurality of coefficient terms; and modifying the gamma of each of the first data values. The data is multiplied by each corresponding coefficient term in the filter core; and each multiplied term is added to generate each of the second data values. 18. The method of claim 15 in the scope of patent application, wherein the gamma correction compensates the human eye's response function to illuminance. 19. The method according to item 15 of the scope of patent application, further comprising performing post-gamma correction on the data presented by the sub-pixel, the post-gamma correction compensating a gamma function provided by the display; and [U-JL Output the post-gamma-corrected sub-pixel rendering data to the display. 20. The method according to item 15 of the patent application, wherein the gamma correction is performed as g_1 (X) = XY〇 21. The method according to item 15 in the patent application, further comprising determining each color The sample area specified in the sampled data of each data point; and determining the resampling area of each sub-pixel element corresponding to each color, wherein calculating the data presented by the sub-pixel includes using a filter core A plurality of coefficient terms, each coefficient term representing an overlap percentage of a given one of the resampling regions over each of the specified sample regions having the given one of the resampling regions. 22. —A method for converting sampling data of an image to a display capable of displaying sub-pixel rendered data using a three-color sub-pixel element, the method comprising: receiving sampling data including a plurality of first data values, each first The data value represents each data point of each color in the image; for each of the first data values in the sampled data, a gamma-corrected data value is generated; and based on the gamma-corrected data value and the first A product of a data value is used to calculate data presented by a sub-pixel including a plurality of second data values, and each second data value corresponds to each sub-pixel element of each color on the display. 23. The method according to item 22 of the scope of patent application, wherein calculating the data presented by the sub-pixel includes calculating a pixel configuration on the display, which includes the alternation of at least one of 1: JL on a horizontal axis and a vertical axis Red and green sub-pixel elements. 24. The method of claim 22, wherein the gamma-adjusted data value includes: calculating a local average of each of the first data values based on the sampled data; and performing gamma on the local average. Adjustment. 25. The method of claim 24, wherein the gamma adjustment is performed as a function of g-Hxhf1. Lu 26. The method of claim 24 in which the first data value includes an edge term and a central term, and the calculation of the local average includes: using the central term of each edge term to calculate A first average; calculating a second average of the central term based on the first average. 27. The method of claim 24, wherein the first data value includes an edge term and a central term, and calculating the local average includes using the central term of each edge term to calculate an average The generated gamma-adjusted data values further include: · Using the average of the edge-terms of the gamma-adjustment to generate a local average of a gamma-adjustment of the central term. 28. The method according to item 22 of the scope of patent application, wherein the calculation of the data presented by the sub-pixel includes: referring to a filter core that includes a plurality of coefficient terms; adjusting the gamma of each of the first data values Multiplying the data by each corresponding coefficient term in the filter core and each of the first-b, H'j Ell data values; and adding each multiplied term to generate each of the second Data value. 29. The method of claim 22, wherein the product of the gamma-adjusted data value and the first data value can compensate a response function of the contrast of the human eye. 30. The method according to item 22 of the scope of patent application, further comprising: performing post-gamma correction on the data presented by the sub-pixel, the post-gamma correction compensating a gamma function provided by the display; and outputting the post-gamma correction Gamma-corrected sub-pixels present data to the display. 31. The method according to item 22 of the scope of patent application, further comprising: determining a sample area specified in the sampled data of each color point of each color; and determining a value of each sub-pixel element corresponding to each color Re-sampling the area, and wherein calculating the data presented by the sub-pixel includes using a plurality of coefficient terms in a filter core, each coefficient term representing a given one of the re-sampling areas overlapping each having the re-sampling The percentage of overlap of the given sample area of the given one in the sample area. 32. The method of claim 31 in the scope of patent application, wherein the first data value includes a corner term, an edge term except for the corner term, and a central term, and the data for calculating the sub-pixel presentation includes : Less use of the corresponding one of the first data values relative to the one represented by the overlap percentage of each of the corner terms; and relative to the one represented by the overlap percentage of the central term I | Ϊ2 ^ (Μ M…-1 #: month-: '. Day uses the corresponding one of the first data value. 33. The method of claim 22 in the scope of patent application, wherein the first data value includes a corner Term, in addition to the edge term of the corner term, and a central term, and the data calculated for the calculation of the sub-pixel includes: reducing the effect of the corner term; and strengthening the effect of the central item to balance the weakening 34. The method of claim 33, wherein the product uses the first data value in a first color of the edge term and the central term, and the weakening and strengthening uses the Corner item and the central item ® the first data value in a second color. 35. The method of claim 22 in the patent application range, wherein the data value for generating the gamma adjustment includes: calculating each of the first data based on the sampled data A local average of one omega adjustment of the data values; and a gamma adjustment of the local average of the omega adjustment. 36. For the method of item 35 of the patent application scope, wherein calculating the local average of the omega adjustment includes: _ For the Omega adjustment is performed for each of the first data values in the sampled data; and a local average of each of the first data values is determined based on the sampled data for the omega adjustment. 37. If the method of item 36 of the patent application, The omega adjustment is an approximation of the response function of the contrast of a human eye. 38. The method according to item 35 of the scope of patent application, wherein the gamma adjustment is performed by f 12 vis 11 11] as g Iw-1 (X) = (W "(X)) Y_1, where W-1 (X) is the inverse function of w (x) = x1 / w. 39. The method of the 35th item of the patent application, wherein the first data value includes an edge term And one central item, The calculating the local average of the omega adjustment includes: using a central term of each of the edge terms to calculate a first omega adjusted average; and calculating a second omega of the central term based on the first omega adjusted average. Adjusted average. 40. The method of claim 35, wherein the first data value includes a ® edge term and a central term, and calculating the local average of the omega adjustment includes using each edge term The central term to calculate an average of an omega adjustment, the generated gamma-adjusted data value further includes: using the gamma-adjusted average of the edge term to generate a local average of a gamma-adjusted central term . 41. The method of claim 22, wherein the data value for generating the gamma adjustment includes: calling for performing the omega adjustment of the first data value; and performing an inverse omega adjustment to generate the data value for the gamma adjustment such that The omega adjustment and the inverted omega adjustment can more affect the data values of the gamma adjustment when the pan frequency of the image becomes more local. 42 · —A system for processing data of a display containing pixels, each pixel having a color sub-pixel, the system includes: Jt h :. .. i — [.… 月 Η A receiving module for receiving pixels Data; and a processing module for performing a conversion from the pixel data to sub-pixel rendering data, and applying a gamma adjustment to the conversion, the conversion generating the sub-pixel rendering data of a pixel configuration, including Alternating red and green sub-pixels on at least one of the horizontal axis and a vertical axis. 43. The system according to item 42 of the patent application scope, wherein the processing module is to provide linearity in the color balance of the data presented by the sub-pixel. 44. The system according to item 43 of the patent application scope, wherein the processing module is to provide a non-linear calculation of the illuminance of the data presented by the sub-pixel. 45. If the system of claim 42 is applied for, the processing module is to perform gamma correction on the pixel data to generate gamma corrected data, and convert the gamma corrected data to the sub-pixel presentation. data. 46. The system according to item 45 of the patent application, wherein the processing module is to perform a gamma correction using a function such as g ^ (x:) = xY. 47. If the system of claim 42 is applied for, the processing module maintains a gamma value adjusted by the gamma for all spatial frequencies at a selected level, and the selected level corresponds to The desired contrast ratio at a certain spatial frequency. 48. The system according to item 42 of the patent application, wherein the processing module calculates a local average based on the pixel data. 49. The system of claim 48, wherein the processing module performs a gamma correction on the local average to generate a gamma corrected local average, and the processing module converts and multiplies the pixel data. The local average of the gamma correction becomes the data presented by the sub-pixel. 50. 如申請專利範圍第49項之系統,其中該處理模組係要執 行使用如之函數的伽瑪修正。 51. 如申請專利範圍第42項之系統,其中該伽瑪調整的一伽 瑪值係選擇來隨著空間頻率增加而增加。 52. 如申請專利範圍第42項之系統,其中該處理模組係要對 該像素資料執行歐米茄修正,以產生歐米茄修正的資 料,並基於該歐米茄修正的資料來計算一歐米茄修正的 局部平均。 53. 如申請專利範圍第52項之系統,其中該處理模組係使用 ® w(x)=x1/w的函數來執行歐米修正。 54. 如申請專利範圍第52項之系統,其中該處理模組係對於 該歐米茄修正的局部平均來執行伽瑪修正,以產生一具 有歐米茄修正的伽瑪局部平均,並轉換成以該像素資料 的該具有歐米茄修正的伽瑪局部平均成為次像素呈現 的資料。 55. 如申請專利範圍第54項之系統,其中該處理模組係要執 行使用如gUw^xMxy1之函數的伽瑪修正。 _ 56. —種運算系統,其包含: 一具有複數個像素之顯示器,其中該像素中至少一個 包含在一水平軸及一垂直軸中至少一個中交替的紅色 及綠色次像素之次像素配置;及 一耦合於該顯示器之控制器,該控制器處理像素資 料,並應用伽瑪調整到由該像素到次像素資料的轉換, 該轉換產生該次像素配置的該次像素呈現的資料,並輸50. The system of claim 49, wherein the processing module is to perform a gamma correction using a function such as. 51. The system according to item 42 of the patent application, wherein a gamma value of the gamma adjustment is selected to increase as the spatial frequency increases. 52. If the system of claim 42 is applied for, the processing module is to perform omega correction on the pixel data to generate omega correction data, and calculate a local average of an omega correction based on the omega correction data. 53. The system of claim 52, wherein the processing module uses the function w (x) = x1 / w to perform Omega correction. 54. The system of claim 52, wherein the processing module performs gamma correction on the local average of the omega correction to generate a gamma local average of the omega correction and converts it to the pixel data. The local average of the gamma with Omega correction becomes the data for sub-pixel presentation. 55. The system as claimed in claim 54 in which the processing module is to perform a gamma correction using a function such as gUw ^ xMxy1. _ 56. —A computing system comprising: a display with a plurality of pixels, wherein at least one of the pixels includes a sub-pixel configuration of red and green sub-pixels alternated in at least one of a horizontal axis and a vertical axis; And a controller coupled to the display, the controller processes the pixel data and applies gamma adjustment to the conversion from the pixel to the sub-pixel data, the conversion generates the data presented by the sub-pixel configured by the sub-pixel, and outputs 出該次像素呈現的資料在該顯示器上。 57. —種用於一顯示器之控制器,其包含: 一接收單元,用以接收像素資料;及 一處理單元,用以應用伽瑪調整到由該像素資料到次 像素呈現資料的轉換,該轉換產生該次像素配置的該次 像素呈現的資料,並輸出該次像素呈現的資料在該顯示 器上。 58. —種紀錄儲存指令之電腦可讀取媒體,該儲存指令在由 一運算系統執行時,可使得該運算系統來執行一用以處 ® 理包含像素之顯示器的資料之方法,每個像素具有彩色 次像素,該方法包含: 接收像素資料; 應用伽瑪調整到由該像素資料到次像素呈現資料的 轉換,該轉換產生一次像素配置的該次像素呈現的資 料,其包含在一水平軸及一垂直軸中至少一個之上的交 替之紅色及綠色次像素;及 输出該次像素呈現的資料。 · 59. —種紀錄儲存指令之電腦可讀取媒醴,該儲存指令在由 一運算系統執行時,可使得該運算系統來執行一對於使 用三色次像素元件而能夠顯示次像素呈現資料的顯示 器來轉換一影像的取樣資料之方法,該方法包含: 接收包含複數個第一資料值的取樣資料,每個第一資 料值代表在該影像中每個彩色的每個資料點; 對於該取樣資料中每個該第一資料值執行伽瑪修 -11 - ll:I23fOI:W - ' i 1-8,ι| 正,以產生伽瑪修正的資料;及 基於該伽瑪修正的資料來計算包含複數個第二資料 值的次像素呈現的資料,每個第二資料值係對應於該顯 示器上每個彩色的每個次像素元件。 60.—種紀錄儲存指令之電腦可讀取媒體,該儲存指令在由 一運算系統執行時,可使得該運算系統來執行一對於使 用三色次像素元件而能夠顯示次像素呈現資料的顯示 器來轉換一影像的取樣資料之方法,該方法包含: 接收包含複數個第一資料值的取樣資料,每個第一資 ® 料值代表在該影像中每個彩色的每個資料點; 對於該取樣的資料中每個該第一資料值來產生伽瑪 調整的資料值;及 基於該伽瑪調整的資料值與該第一資料值的乘積來 計算包含複數個第二資料值的次像素呈現的資料,每個 第二資料值係對應於該顯示器上每個彩色的每個次像 素元件。 -12-The data presented by the sub-pixel is displayed on the display. 57. A controller for a display, comprising: a receiving unit for receiving pixel data; and a processing unit for applying gamma adjustment to conversion from the pixel data to sub-pixel presentation data, the The data generated by the sub-pixel configured by the sub-pixel configuration is converted, and the data presented by the sub-pixel is output on the display. 58. —A computer-readable medium of record storage instructions that, when executed by a computing system, enables the computing system to execute a method for processing data on a display containing pixels, each pixel With color sub-pixels, the method includes: receiving pixel data; applying gamma adjustment to the conversion of the pixel data to sub-pixel rendering data, the conversion generating the sub-pixel rendering data in a pixel configuration, which includes a horizontal axis And alternating red and green sub-pixels on at least one of a vertical axis; and outputting data presented by the sub-pixels. · 59. — A computer-readable medium of record storage instructions, which when executed by an operating system, enables the operating system to execute a method for displaying sub-pixel presentation data using a three-color sub-pixel element A method for converting sampling data of an image by a display, the method comprising: receiving sampling data including a plurality of first data values, each first data value representing each data point of each color in the image; for the sampling Gamma repair-11-ll: I23fOI: W-'i 1-8, ι | is performed for each of the first data values in the data to generate gamma corrected data; and calculations are performed based on the gamma corrected data Sub-pixel presentation data including a plurality of second data values, each second data value corresponding to each sub-pixel element of each color on the display. 60. A computer-readable medium of record storage instructions that, when executed by an operating system, enables the operating system to execute a display that uses three-color sub-pixel elements to display sub-pixel presentation data A method for converting sampling data of an image, the method comprising: receiving sampling data including a plurality of first data values, each first data value representing each data point of each color in the image; for the sampling Each of the first data values in the data to generate a gamma-adjusted data value; and based on the product of the gamma-adjusted data value and the first data value, calculating Data, each second data value corresponds to each sub-pixel element of each color on the display. -12-
TW91117885A 2001-08-08 2002-08-08 Methods and systems for sub-pixel rendering with gamma adjustment TWI238011B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US31113801P 2001-08-08 2001-08-08
US31295501P 2001-08-15 2001-08-15
US31294601P 2001-08-15 2001-08-15
US31305401P 2001-08-16 2001-08-16
US31462201P 2001-08-23 2001-08-23

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TWI238011B true TWI238011B (en) 2005-08-11

Family

ID=36930024

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW91117885A TWI238011B (en) 2001-08-08 2002-08-08 Methods and systems for sub-pixel rendering with gamma adjustment

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI238011B (en)

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7221381B2 (en) Methods and systems for sub-pixel rendering with gamma adjustment
US7184066B2 (en) Methods and systems for sub-pixel rendering with adaptive filtering
JP5072872B2 (en) How to limit the filter kernel divisor
TWI238011B (en) Methods and systems for sub-pixel rendering with gamma adjustment
CN101123061A (en) Conversion of a sub-pixel format data to another
TWI237509B (en) Methods and systems for sub-pixel rendering with gamma adjustment and adaptive filtering
KR20120057175A (en) Flat Panel Diaplay And Color Image Processing Method Thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MK4A Expiration of patent term of an invention patent